ZCL

Operator’s
Manual,

ZCL Operator’s Manual,
Volume 2
© 2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation

Part No. 161335

October 2003

© 2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation
All Rights Reserved Worldwide
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation
Building 1, Suite 200, 2101 CityWest, Houston, Texas 77042, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone: 713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2401
Web: www.lgc.com

Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3Dview, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, ADC,
ARIES, Asset Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat,
CDDM, COMPASS, Contouring Assistant, Corporate Data Archiver, Corporate Data Store, DataStar, DBPlot,
Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionDesktop, DecisionSpace, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace
Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace PowerModel, DecisionSpace PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace TrackPlanner,
DecisionSpace Well Seismic Fusion, DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme,
DepthTeam Interpreter, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Drillability Suite,
DrillModel, DrillVision, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube,
EdgeCa$h, eLandmark, Engineer's Desktop, EOS-PAK, EPM, Executive Assistant, FastTrack, FZAP!,
GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix (stylized), GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus,
GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, Landmark, Landmark and Design,
Landmark logo and Design, LandScape, Lattix, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep,
Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MIRA, Model Builder, MultiWell, MyLandmark, MyWorkspace, OpenBooks,
OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenOrigin, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks,
OpenWorks Well File, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus,
Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PowerView, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAGIC, ProMAX,
ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, QUICKDIF,
QUIKCDP, QUIKDIG, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, Real Freedom,
Real-Time Asset Management Center, Real-Time Asset Management Centre, Real Time Knowledge Company,
Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace,
SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks MultiView, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisXchange, Sierra,
Sierra (design), SigmaView, SimResults, SIVA, SpecDecomp, StrataMap, StrataModel, StrataAmp, StrataSim,
StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, Surf & Connect, SynTool, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients,
System Start for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, T2B, TDQ, Team Workspace, TeamView, TERAS,
Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VIP,
VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement,
VIP-THERM, WavX, Web Editor, Web OpenWorks, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN,
WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, Xsource, You're in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus
are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

Landmark

‘ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Contents

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2
Process Descriptions continued from Volume 1
Nadcon ..........................................................................................................
()

1

NIV Time to Depth ........................................................................................
(NIVA)

2

North Arrow ..................................................................................................
(N ARR)

6

Orthogonal Contours ...................................................................................
(FLOWLINES)

8

Overlay ..........................................................................................................
()

13

Overpost Resolve .........................................................................................
(RESOLVE OVERPLOT)

15

Patch Grid .....................................................................................................
(GRID PATCHING)

21

Picture ...........................................................................................................
(PICT)

22

Picture Assembly .........................................................................................
(ASSM)

34

Picture Stats .................................................................................................
(PIC STATS)

36

Point Gridding ..............................................................................................
(P GRD)

40

Point Grid Plus .............................................................................................
(THROW GRIDDING)

47

R2003.12.0

Contents

iii

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Polygon Clip .................................................................................................
(CLIP POLYGON)

62

Post Data .......................................................................................................
(DATA POSTING)

64

Post Data New ..............................................................................................
(DATA POSTING NEW)

66

Post Data to ZGF ..........................................................................................

99

Post DLS ....................................................................................................... 100
(DLS POSTING)
Post Grid Nodes ........................................................................................... 103
(GRID POSTING)
Post Lattice ................................................................................................... 105
(LATTICE POSTING)
Post Lease .................................................................................................... 106
(LEASE POSTING)
Post Lines ..................................................................................................... 112
(DRAW LINES)
Post NTS ....................................................................................................... 115
(NTS POSTING)
Post Seismic ................................................................................................. 123
(SEISMIC POSTING)
Post Seismic New ........................................................................................ 132
(SEISMIC POST NEW)
Post Star Symbol ......................................................................................... 147
(STAR SYMBOL POST)
Post Text ....................................................................................................... 150
(P TEXT)
Projection ...................................................................................................... 152
(PROJ)

R2003.12.0

Contents

iv

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Projection End .............................................................................................. 155
(E PRJ)
Quality Assure .............................................................................................. 156
(CP GRID QA)
Quick Volumetrics ........................................................................................ 159
(QUICK VOL)
Random Grid ................................................................................................ 161
(GRIDRAND)
Range Edit .................................................................................................... 164
()
Rasterize Faults ............................................................................................ 166
(FLT RASTER)
Reinitialize .................................................................................................... 167
(INIT)
Rename MFD ................................................................................................ 168
(CHANGE MFD NAME)
Rename Pict .................................................................................................. 169
(REN PIC)
Reset Cell To Well ........................................................................................ 170
(CELL VAL = WELL VAL)
Rotate Data ................................................................................................... 171
(ROTA)
Scale Bar ....................................................................................................... 173
(SCAL)
Scale Bias LNAR .......................................................................................... 175
(S B LNAR)
Seis Append XY ............................................................................................ 177
(APPEND XY)

R2003.12.0

Contents

v

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Seis Interp Thin ............................................................................................ 179
(SEIS THIN)
Select ............................................................................................................. 191
(DATA SUBSETTING)
Select Seismic Data To Post ....................................................................... 209
Shaded Relief ............................................................................................... 210
(RELIEF SHADING)
Show Files .................................................................................................... 212
(LIST FILES)
Single Data Ops ............................................................................................ 214
(DATA TO DATA)
Single Grid Ops ............................................................................................ 218
(GRID TO GRID)
Sort ................................................................................................................ 221
()
Spawn ............................................................................................................ 223
()
Squash MFD ................................................................................................. 225
(COMPRESS MFD)
Squash ZGF .................................................................................................. 226
(COMPRESS ZGF)
Stop ............................................................................................................... 227
()
Surface Intersect .......................................................................................... 228
(INTERSECT SURFS)
Surfaces Diagram ......................................................................................... 229
(Z3D)
Syntax Only .................................................................................................. 249
(SYNTAX)

R2003.12.0

Contents

vi

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

System Parms .............................................................................................. 250
()
Text ................................................................................................................ 251
(TXT)
Thin Text Fields ............................................................................................ 253
(REMOVE CHAR DUPS)
Thinning ........................................................................................................ 254
(THIN)
Three D Time To Depth ................................................................................ 257
(T T D I)
Three D Timeslice ........................................................................................ 258
(TSLICE)
Time Migration .............................................................................................. 260
(TIME MIGR)
Title Block ..................................................................................................... 263
(T BLK)
Transform Coords ........................................................................................ 265
(T COORD)
Trend Gridding ............................................................................................. 267
(TREND)
Tri Scaling ..................................................................................................... 270
(SCALE XY)
User Grid Filter ............................................................................................. 272
(USER FILTER)
Vel Fun Time To Depth ................................................................................ 276
(T T D II)
Velocity Gridding ......................................................................................... 278
(GRID VEL)

R2003.12.0

Contents

vii

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Volume Report .............................................................................................. 280
(VOL REPORT)
Volumetrics ................................................................................................... 286
(VOLM)
Water Saturation .......................................................................................... 289
(AVERAGE SW GRID)
Write Cell Table ............................................................................................ 292
(WRITE CELL FILE)
Write Resin Faults ........................................................................................ 294
(WRITE FAULTS)
Write Resin Wells ......................................................................................... 295
(WRITE WELL FILE)
Write Text ...................................................................................................... 297
(PUT INFO)
ZGF Info ........................................................................................................ 300
()

R2003.12.0

Contents

viii

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Nadcon
Name

NADCON

Alternate Name
Function

This process converts NAD27 latitudes and longitudes to NAD83
latitudes and longitudes and vice versa.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FILEIN

C*24

Input file name.

FILEOUT

C*24

Output file name.

MFDIN

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

MFDOUT

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 0

INFLDLT

I

Field number of the Latitude field in the input data file.
Default Value = First field of the correct type

INFLDLN

I

Field number of the Longitude field in the input data file.
Default Value = First field of the correct type

FLDNAMLT C*20

Name of the output field to receive converted latitude
values.

FLDNAMLN C*20

Name of the output field to receive converted longitude
values.

DIRECT

Conversion type.
Default Value = 27TO83
Options:

ZNON

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Defaults

C*8

R

27TO83

= Convert from NAD27 to NAD83

83TO27

= Convert from NAD83 to NAD27

Null data value for the file being created.
Default Value = ZNON value of the input file.

Process

1

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

NIV Time to Depth
Name

NIV TIME TO DEPTH

Alternate Name NIVA
Function

This process performs Time to Depth conversion using normalized
interval velocities on data or grid files. In the case of a data file, the
input file needs to contain the isochrons, the normalized interval
velocities, and the top horizon depths. For grids, this information is
input as three grids.

Example

for data input:

C
This example creates 3 new fields in the output file containing the
C
top-lapped base depths, the base depths, and interval velocities.
C
NIVA:20,00 DATAIN =’EXAMPLE INPUT’,
DATAOUT =’EXAMPLE OUTPUT’,
MFDATOUT=
ISOFLD =2,
TOPFLD
= 1,
NVELFLD =
LAPNAME =’TOP-LAPPED BASE DPTH’,
BASENAME=
DEPTH’,
LAPFLD =-1,
BASEFLD =-1,
VELNAME =’INTERVAL VELOCITY’,
VELFLD =
ONEORTWO=1,
TIMEUNIT = 1,
MINVEL =
NORMDEP =2000.0, INVCMPR = 1.865 /

2,
3,
’BASE

-1,
8500.0,

ZCL can be instructed to write the output data field numbers into a
ZCL Data Block so that other processes can access this information.
Create a DATA BLOCK that contains at least three INTEGER
locations.
DATA BLOCK:10,00 HOWMANY =3, DATATYPE=’INTEGER’, DATASIZE = 1 /
C
NIVA:20,00 DATAIN =’EXAMPLE INPUT’,
DATAOUT =’EXAMPLE OUTPUT’,
MFDATOUT= 2,
ISOFLD =2,
TOPFLD
= 1,
NVELFLD = 3,
LAPNAME =’TOP-LAPPED BASE DPTH’,
BASENAME= ’BASE
DEPTH’,
LAPFLD =-1,
BASEFLD =-1,
VELNAME =’INTERVAL VELOCITY’,
VELFLD = -1,
ONEORTWO=1,
TIMEUNIT = 1,
MINVEL = 8500.0,
NORMDEP =2000.0, INVCMPR = 1.865 DNUM
= 10 /

R2003.12.0

Process

2

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

By specifying DNUM=10 in the NIV Process, the user has specified
that DATA BLOCK 10 is filled in the following manner:
Location
1

Information Present
Field number for the top-lapped base depth data in the output
data file, defaulted to 0 (no field is output)
Field number for the base depth data in the output data file,
defaulted to 0 (no field is output)
Field number for the interval velocity data in the output data file,
defaulted to 0 (no field is output)

2
3
Example

for grid input:
NIVA:20,00

ISOGRDI =’TIME ISOCHRON’,
TOPGRDI =’TOP FORMATION’,
NVELGRDI=’NORM.INT.VELOCITY’,
LAPGRDO =’TOP-LAPPED BASE DEPTH’,
BASEGRDO=’BASE DEPTH’,
VELGRDO =’INTERVAL VELOCITY’,
MFDBASE =2,
MFDVEL
=2,
MFDLAP
ONEORTWO=1,
TIMEUNIT =1,
MINVEL

=2,
=

8500.0,
NORMDEP =2000.0,

INVCMPR

=1.865 /

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

° ISOGRDI

C*24

Grid
files

Name of the input isochron grid. Required if the input is
from grids.

MFDISO

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input isochron grid.
Default Value = 0

° TOPGRDI

C*24

Grid
files

Name of the input horizon top depth grid. Required if
input is from grids.

MFDTOP

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input horizon top
depth grid.
Default Value = 0

° NVELGRDI

C*24

Grid
files

Name of the input normalized interval velocity grid.
Required if input is from grids.

MFDNVEL

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input normalized
interval velocity grid.
Default Value = 0

C*24

Fault
files

Name of the input horizon top depth fault file. Required if
DATAIN is blank.

° TOPFLT

R2003.12.0

Process

3

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDTOPF

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input horizon top
depth fault file.
Default Value = 0

C*24

Fault
files

Name of the input normalized interval velocity fault file.
Required if DATAIN is blank.

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input normalized
interval velocity fault file.
Default Value = 0

C*24

Data
files

Name of the input data file. Required if data is not from
grids, i.e., ISOGRDI, TOPGRDI, and NVELGRDI are
not used.

MFDATIN

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0

LAPGRDO

C*24

° NVELFLT
MFDNVELD

° DATAIN

MFDLAP

I

Range Description and Default

Name of the output top-lapped base depth grid.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

BASEGRDO C*24
MFDBASE

I

VELGRDO

C*24

MFDVEL

I

° DATAOUT

C*24

MFDATOUT
LAPNAME

I
C*20

BASENAME C*20

R2003.12.0

Number of the MFD to contain the output top-lapped base
depth grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output base depth grid.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output base depth grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output interval velocity grid.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output interval
velocity grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output data file. Required if input is from
data file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output top-lapped base depth field.
Default Value = Blank
Name of the output base depth field.
Default Value = Blank

Process

4

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LAPNAME

C*20

Range Description and Default
Name of the output interval velocity field.
Default Value = Blank

° ISOFLD

I

Field number for the isochron data in the input data file.
Required if input is from data.

° TOPFLD

I

Field number for the horizon top depth data in the input
data file. Required if input is from data.

° NVELFLD

I

Field number for the normalized interval velocity data in
the input data file. Required if input is from data.

LAPFLD

I

Field number for the top-lapped base depth data in the
output file.
Default Value = 0
Range Options:
<0 = Create a new field
0 = Do not output field
>0 = Overwrite specified field

BASEFLD

I

Field number for the base depth data in the output data
file.
Default Value = 0
Range Options: Same as LAPFLD

VELFLD

I

Field number for the interval velocity data in the output
data file.
Default Value = 0
Range Options: Same as LAPFLD

ONEORTWO

I

1–2

One way or two way time flag.
Default Value = 2
Options:
1 = One way time
2 = Two way time

TIMEUNIT

I

1–2

Units of time flag.
Default Value = 1
Options:
1 = Seconds
2 = Milliseconds

R2003.12.0

• MINVEL

R

Minimal interval velocity.

• NORMDEP

R

Normalization depth.

• INVCMPR

R

Inverse compression factor, i.e., N of 1/N.

Process

5

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
DNUM

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
I

Range Description and Default
Use number for the output DATA BLOCK Process. The
DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is non-zero
and the DATA BLOCK already exists. Field numbers for
newly created fields would be written to such a Data
Block.

Process

6

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

North Arrow
Name

NORTH ARROW

Alternate Name N ARR
Function

This process draws a North Arrow (LGB type 10) on a picture.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

° XEND1

R

The x location of the bottom (feathers) of the arrow.
Required if SPECIFY = END.

° YEND1

R

The y location of the bottom (feathers) of the arrow.
Required if SPECIFY = END.

° XEND2

R

The x location of the top (point) of the arrow. Required if
SPECIFY = END.

° YEND2

R

The y location of the top (point) of the arrow. Required if
SPECIFY = END.

XCENTER

R

The x location of the center point of the arrow. Used if
SPECIFY = CENTER.
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

YCENTER

R

The y location of the center point of the arrow. Used if
SPECIFY = CENTER.
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

HEIGHT

R

Height (length) of the arrow, in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if SPECIFY = CENTER.
Default Value = 2.0 in or 5.0 cm

ROTATE

R

0.0–
360.0

Clockwise rotation from vertical of the arrow, in degrees.
Used if map is not projected and SPECIFY = CENTER.
Default Value = 0.0 degrees

Process

7

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SPECIFY

C*8

UNITS

R2003.12.0

C*12

Range Description and Default
Method for locating the arrow.
Default Value = CENTER
Options:
END

= Endpoints (XEND1, YEND1, XEND2,
YEND2) are supplied.

CENTER

= Center point (XCENTER, YCENTER) is
supplied.

Units for expressing the coordinates of the points.
Default Value = UNSCALED
Options:
SCALED

= Engineering or user coordinates

UNSCALED

= Plotter units

Process

8

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Orthogonal Contours
Name

ORTHOGONALCONTOURS

Alternate Name FLOWLINES
Function

This process produces “orthogonal contours” or flowlines. Flowlines
are curves that represent the flow of fluid updip and/or downdip over a
gridded surface.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

° GRIDIN

C*24

MFDGRIDIN

° STARTPNT

I

STOPLINE

C*24

MFDSTOP

I

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT I

R2003.12.0

0-5

C*20

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input startpoint file. This file must be a
DATA, VERT or FALT type file.

0-5

Number of the MFD that contains the StartPoint data.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input stopline file. This file must be a
DATA, VERT or FALT type file.

0-5

Number of the MFD that contains the stopline file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file. This must be a VERT or
FALT type file.

0-5

C*24

MFDOUTLN I
ZFIELD

Name of the input GRID file.

C*24

MFDSTART i

• OUTLINES

Range Description and Default

Number of the MFD that contains the fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output Flowline Profile DATA type file.

0-5

Number of the MFD that contains the output file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the Z-field to add to the output file.
If no name is specified, no Z field will be added. If a field
of this type exists on the input StartPoint file, it will be
used.

Process

9

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DIPANGFD

C*20

Name of the DipAngle field to add to the output file. If no
name is specified, no DipAngle field will be added to the
output file. If a field of this type exists in the StartPoint
file, it is copied to the output file.

DIPAZIFD

C*20

Name of the DipAzimuth field to add to the output file. If
no name is specified, no DipAzimuth field will be added
to the new file. If a field of this type exists in the input
startpoint file, that field is copied to the output file.

DISTFELD

C*20

Name of the Distance field to add to the output file. If no
name is specified, no Distance field will be added.

UPORDOW
N

C*4

Flow direction control.
Default Value = UP
Options:

SELECT

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default

UP

= Flow Updip, toward larger Z values.

DOWN

= Flow Downdip, toward smaller Z values.

BOTH

= Flow both Updip and Downdip

Output point selection.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= Output all points in each trace.

INT+END

= Output all but the first point in each
trace.
The first point is the StartPoint, unless
UPORDOWN is BOTH.

END ONLY

= Output only the last point in each trace

BOTHENDS

= Output both first and last points in each
trace.

Process

10

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MODEL

C*8

DISTANCE

GENERAL

C*4

C*4

GENRTOLR R

REPORT

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default
Grid interpolation surface model.
Default Value = BILINEAR
Options:
BILINEAR

= Use a bilinear surface determined by
the Z values at the corners of the grid
cell.

BICUBIC

= Use a smooth bicubic surface
determined by the 16 grid Z values
nearest the grid cell.

BIQUINTIC

= Use a smooth JJD biquintic surface
determined by the sixteen grid Z
values nearest the grid cell

Metric to measure distance along orthogonal contour
profiles.
Default Value = XY
Options:
XY

= Measure Euclidean distance in the XY plane.

XYZ

= Measure Euclidean distance in Three-space.

Generalize the output profile traces.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Generalize

NO

= Do not generalize

0.0 to Tolerance for line generalization of output traces.
Infinity Required if GENERAL = YES (the default). Ignored if
GENERAL = NO.
Default Value = 0.9999 * DISTSTEP
Generates a progress report at the level of detail you
specify.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE

= Report only errors

PARTIAL

= Report only totals at end

FULL

= Report on each profile track

Process

11

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

STARTXFD

I

Field number of the X field in the input startpoint file
Default Value = The first X field in the file.

STARTYFD

I

Field number of the Y field in the input startpoint file.
Default Value = The first Y field in the file

STOPXFLD

I

Field number of the X field in the input stopline file.
Default Value = The first X field in the file.

STOPYFLD

I

Field number of the Y field in the input stopline file.
Default Value = The first Y field in the file.

STOPZFLD

I

Field number of the Z field in the input stopline file.
Default Value = The first Z field in the file.

STOPIDFD

I

Field number of the SegID field in the input stopline file.
Default Value = The first SegID field in the file.

FALTXFLD

I

Field number of the X field in the input fault file.
Default Value = The first X field in the file.

FALTYFLD

I

Field number of the Y field in the input fault file.
Default Value = The first Y field in the file

FALTIDFD

I

Field number of the SegID field in the input fault file.
Default Value = The first SegID field in the file.

DISTSTEP

R

0 to
Length of each step.
Infinity Default Value = 1/3 of the grid increment

DISTJUMP

R

0.0 to Distance to jump when trying to jump out of a pit.
Infinity Default Value = 0.0

BIASANGL

R

-180.0 Angle to turn from true slope direction. Measured by
to 360.0degrees in a positive, clockwise direction
Default Value = 0.0

ZMINSTOP

R

Minimum Z value. If a trace goes below this level, stop
tracing.
Default Value = Zmin of the grid

ZMAXSTOP R

Maximum Z value. If a trace goes above this level, stop
tracing.
Default Value = Zmax of the grid

Process

12

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

DZMINSTP

R

-Infinit Minimum delta Z value. If a trace goes above its
y to 0.0 startpoint Z value plus DZMAXSTP, stop tracing. This
value must be a negative real number.
Default Value = -(Grid Z range)

DZMAXSTP R

0.0 to Maximum delta-Z value. If a trace goes above its
Infinity startpoint X value pule DZMAXSTP, stop tracing.
Default Value = Z range of the grid.

DISTMAX

R

0.0 to Maximum distance to follow a flowline. Measured
Infinity according to parameter DISTANCE, q.v.
Default Value = 4 (Grid Diagonal)

DISTMIN

R

Minimum distance to follow a flowline. If the length of a
flowline profile is less than DISTMIN, it will not be
written to the output file. Measured according to
parameter DISTANCE, q.v.
Default Value = 1/1000 (Grid Diagonal)

SAMPLESP

R

0.0 to Interval to sample input lines on file STARTPNT to
Infinity generate evenly spaced startpoints. If zero, actual vertices
from file STARTPNT will be used as startpoints. If
positive, file STARTPNT must have a SegID field.
Default Value = 0.0

Process

13

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Overlay
Name

OVERLAY

Alternate Name
Function

This process allows the overlaying of one or more graphic segments
from an existing input picture onto another picture.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.
The FROMPICT picture’s color table is used in this process. The
TOPICT picture must already exist.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

FROMZGF

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains FROMPICT.
Default Value = Current graphics file specified by the
PICTURE Process

FROMPICT

C*80

Name of the picture that is the source for all or some of
the copied graphic features.
Default Value = Current picture specified by the
PICTURE Process

TOZGF

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains TOPICT.
Default Value = Current graphics file specified by the
PICTURE Process

• TOPICT

C*80

Name of the output picture. This picture must exist.

DIVIDE

C*20

Method of handling the division of features from the input
picture.
Default Value = MAINTAIN DIVISIONS
Options:
SINGLE FEATURE

= Copy input features into one
feature on output picture

MAINTAIN
DIVISIONS

= Preserve feature distinction
during copy

Process

14

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CUTLINE

C*12

LGBTYPES

I

Range Description and Default
Drawing of a cutline around the map.
Default Value = NO CUTLINE
Options:
CUTLINE

= Draw a cutline

NO CUTLINE

= Do not draw cutline

≤1000 Array of up to 40 graphics feature types to copy.
One code is assigned to each feature type, unless all
available types are to copy, in which case set LGBTYPES
to a negative number. See “Appendix A. Graphics Feature
Codes” in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual for a list of
available graphics feature codes.
Default Value = Output all features
Range Options:
1–1000
0
<0

R2003.12.0

= Output that feature
= Ignore
= Output all features

Process

15

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Overpost Resolve
Name

OVERPOST RESOLVE

Alternate Name RESOLVE OVERPLOT
Function

This process eliminates label overplotting for all control points,
seismic shotpoints and seismic line names. In moving these labels, the
process tries not to put them on the map border, contour or lease labels.
Overplotting that cannot be resolved is placed on another picture or
optionally allowed to remain in an overplotted configuration.

Valid Combinations for Well or Control Point Labels
There are eight possible label placements for a label associated with a
control point or well symbol.
top-left

top-center

top-right

center-left
bottom-left

center-right
bottom-center

bottom-right

Well Symbol Label Positions

The default penalties associated with alternate label placements follow
the pattern shown below.
2

0

4
7

1
3

5

6

Default Penalty Weightings
The penalties are rotated so that the 0 penalty position corresponds to
the original placement of the label on the input map. For example, if
the original label placement was center-right, then 0 penalty points
would be charged if the label could take that position on the output
map; 1 penalty point would be charged for placing the label in the
down-right position; and 2 penalty points would be charged for placing
the label in the top-right position.
If the user specifies the well label placement penalties, the input label
position is always assumed as “top-center”. The user must mentally
rotate the penalty pattern to account for maps if the label does not
appear in that position on the input map.

R2003.12.0

Process

16

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Generally speaking, the penalty pattern in Default Penalty Weightings
favors label placements on the same side of a symbol. For example, if
the label was originally placed above its symbol, placement above, and
above and to the right of the symbol is favored over placement below,
and below and to the left.
Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FROMZGF

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains FROMPICT.
Default Value = Current graphics file specified by the
PICTURE Process

FROMPICT

C*80

Name of the picture that contains the overpost problems.
Default Value = Current picture specified by the
PICTURE Process

TOZGF

C*80

Name of the graphics file to contain TOPICT.
Default Value = Current graphics file specified by the
PICTURE Process

• TOPICT

C*80

Name of the output picture to contain the corrected
overposts.

DELPICT

C*80

Name of the optimal output picture to contain labels
whose overposts could not be resolved and all other
graphic elements except the resolved overposts.
Default Value = Blank

WELLOUT

C*24

Name of the data file to hold deleted well labels.
Default Value = Blank

MFDWELL

I

SEISOUT

C*24

MFDSEIS

I

Range Description and Default

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the deleted well label file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the optional data file to hold deleted shotpoint
labels.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the deleted shotpoint
labels file, SEISOUT.
Default Value = 1

Process

17

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

REPORT

C*20

Range Description and Default
Information to report.
Default Value = LABELS AND COUNTS
Options:
NONE

= No interim information

COUNTS

= Number of the iteration is printed

LABELS AND COUNTS

PRIWELLL

I

PRISILNL

I

1–4

Priority of the seismic line name labels relative to the
other 3 label types.
Default Value = 2

PRISISPL

I

1–4

Priority of the seismic shotpoint labels relative to the
other 3 label types.
Default Value = 3

PRIBAKGL

I

1–4

Priority of the background labels (well labels whose well
symbol is blank) relative to the other 3 label types.
Default Value = 4

DELWELLL

C*20

DELSILNL

R2003.12.0

= Full report on detected
overposts and label
placement optimization
efforts

C*20

Priority of the well labels relative to the other 3 label
types.
Default Value = 1

Deletion of well labels from the map to resolve an
overpost.
Default Value = DELETION ALLOWED
Options:
DELETION ALLOWED

= Delete well labels

DELETION
FORBIDDEN

= Do not delete well labels

Deletion of seismic line names from the map to resolve an
overpost.
Default Value = DELETION ALLOWED
Options:
DELETION ALLOWED

= Delete seismic line names

DELETION
FORBIDDEN

= Do not delete seismic line
names

Process

18

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DELSISPL

C*20

DELBAKGL

Range Description and Default
Deletion of seismic shotpoint labels from the map to
resolve an overpost.
Default Value = DELETION ALLOWED
Options:

C*20

DELETION
ALLOWED

= Deletes seismic shotpoint labels.

DELETION
FORBIDDEN

= Do not shotpoint labels.

Deletion of background labels from the map to resolve an
overpost.
Default Value = DELETION ALLOWED
Options:
DELETION ALLOWED = Delete background labels
DELETION
FORBIDDEN

R2003.12.0

= Do not delete background
labels

WGHTDSPL

I

0–8

Penalty weight for deletion of shotpoint label.
Default Value = 2

WGHTKSPL

I

0–8

Penalty weight for keeping original position of shotpoint
labels.
Default Value = 0

WGHTMSPL

I

0–8

Penalty weight for moving shotpoint label to opposite of
line.
Default Value = 1

WGHTDLWL

I

0–10

Penalty weight for deletion of well label.
Default Value = 8

WGHTTCWL

I

0–10

Penalty weight for top center position of well label.
Default Value = 0

WGHTBCWL

I

0–10

Penalty weight for bottom center position of well label.
Default Value = 5

WGHTLFWL

I

0–10

Penalty weight for left position of well label.
Default Value = 4

WGHTTLWL

I

0–10

Penalty weight for top left position of well label.
Default Value = 2

Process

19

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

WGHTBLWL

I

0–10

Penalty weight for bottom left position of well label.
Default Value = 7

WGHTRTWL

I

0–10

Penalty weight for right position of well label.
Default Value = 3

WGHTTRWL

I

0–10

Penalty weight for top right position of well label.
Default Value = 1

WGHTBRWL

I

0–10

Penalty weight for bottom right position of well label.
Default Value = 6

WGHTDLNL

I

0–4

Penalty weight for deletion of line name.
Default Value = 4

WGHTOLNL

I

0–4

Penalty weight for keeping original position of line name
label.
Default Value = 0

WGHT30CL

I

0–4

Penalty weight for 30 degree clockwise rotation of line
name label relative to line.
Default Value = 1

WGHT30CC

I

0–4

Penalty weight for 30 degree clockwise rotation of line
name label relative to line.
Default Value = 2

WGHTDLBG

I

0–4

Penalty weight for deletion of the background label (well
label whose well symbol is blank).
Default Value = 2

WGHTMOBG

I

0–4

Penalty weight for keeping the background label in its
original position.
Default Value = 0

WGHTDLCL

I

1–10

Weight factor for deletion of cultural label.
Default Value = 8

WGHTTCCL

I

1–10

Weight factor for top center position of cultural label.
Default Value = 0

WGHTBCCL

I

1–10

Weight factor for bottom center position of cultural label.
Default Value = 6

WGHTLFCL

I

1–10

Weight factor for left position of cultural label.
Default Value = 4

Process

20

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

WGHTTLCL

I

1–10

Weight factor for top left position of cultural label.
Default Value = 2

WGHTBLCL

I

1–10

Weight factor for bottom left position of cultural label.
Default Value = 7

WGHTRTCL

I

1–10

Weight factor for right position of cultural label.
Default Value = 3

WGHTTRCL

I

1–10

Weight factor for top right position of cultural label.
Default Value = 1

WGHTBRCL

I

1–10

Weight factor for bottom right position of cultural label.
Default Value = 5

UNMOVTGL C*20

MOVEDTGL

R2003.12.0

Drawing of well symbol tag lines for unmoved labels.
Default Value = TAG LINES DRAWN
Options:

C*20

TAG LINES DRAWN

= Draw tag lines

TAG LINES NOT DRAWN

= Do not draw tag lines

Drawing of well symbol tag lines for moved labels.
Default Value = TAG LINES DRAWN
Options:
TAG LINES DRAWN

= Draw tag lines

TAG LINES NOT DRAWN

= Do not draw tag lines

WELLSYMB

I

0–100 New symbol code to use for all symbols whose labels
have been deleted.
Default Value = 0, use original symbol

SYMBCOLR

I

0–255 New symbol color code to use for all symbols whose
labels have been deleted.
Default Value = 2

SZREDFAC

R

0.0–
1.25

Factor to multiply box surrounding label by to change its
size before overpost detection.
This box is compared to other boxes to determine if the
labels overpost onto one another. Usually this number is
reduced in size allowing labels to overlay somewhat.
Default Value = 1.0

Process

21

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Patch Grid
Name

PATCH GRID

Alternate Name GRID PATCHING
Function

This process cuts data from the patch grid and pastes it onto the output
grid as replacement data.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• PATCH
MFDPATCH
FAULTS
MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24
I

Name of the input patch grid.
0–5

C*24
I

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

Number of the MFD that contains the input patch grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file for the patch grid.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input grid to patch.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0

GRIDOUT

C*24

Name of the output grid file.
Default Value = Based upon the input grid file name.

MFDOUT

I

FLTXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the fault file.
Default Value = First X field

FLTYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the fault file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the fault file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

ZNON

R

Null data value for the output grid file.
Default Value = ZNON of the z field being gridded

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1

Process

22

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Picture
Name

PICTURE

Alternate Name PICT
Function

This process opens a graphics file and picture ready to receive
graphics. If the map is projected, the PROJECTION setup commands
must be executed before the picture is opened. The Latitude and
Longitude parameters are required for projected maps and ignored
otherwise.

Valid Combinations for Parameter SCALTYPE

Table 1:
SCALTYPE
Related
Parameters

ABSOLUTE

UNITSPERINC
H

MAPTOGROUN
D

Req

Req

XSCALE

Req

YSCALE

Req

DATUNITS*

Req

Req

MAPUNITS

Req

GRDUNITS

Req

ABSSCALE

* Not required if using a projection with a defined data unit, such as UTM (meters).

Parameters for graphics file & picture
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file to contain or that contains the
picture to open.
This picture receives information from or can be
displayed by other ZCL processes.

HEADER

C*80

Header text for the graphics file. Used if the graphics file
is new.
Default Value = Blank

C*3

Whether the graphics file is old or new.
Options:

• NEWZGF

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

NEW

= New Graphics File

OLD

= Old Graphics File

Process

23

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
• PICTURE
NEWPICT

PICTYPE

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*80

Name of the picture file to open or create.

C*3

Whether the picture is old or new.
Default Value = NEW
Options:

C*16

NEW

= New picture

OLD

= Old picture

Type of picture to create. Used if NEWPICT = NEW.
Default Value = BASEMAP
Options:
BASEMAP

= Basemap plot

CROSS-SECTION = Cross-section plot

Parameters for AOI Source
AOISRCE

R2003.12.0

C*8

Source for new picture AOI. Used if NEWPICT = NEW.
Default Value = USER
Options:
GRID

= Grid file

DATA

= Data file

PICTURE

= Another existing picture

USER

= User specifies through prescribed series of
parameters

CONTOUR

= Contour file

° AOIFILE

C*24

Name of the file whose AOI defines the AOI of a new
picture. Required if AOISRCE = GRID or DATA.

MFDIN

I

° AOIZGF

C*80

Graphics file that contains the picture whose AOI defines
the AOI of a new picture. Required if AOISRCE =
PICTURE.

° AOIPICT

C*80

Picture whose AOI defines the AOI of a new picture.
Required if AOISRCE = PICTURE.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the file whose AOI
defines the AOI of a new picture. Used if AOISRCE =
GRID or DATA.
Default Value = 0

Process

24

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

AOITYPE

C*20

Range Description and Default
Coordinates used to define the corners of the picture.
Note: The PROJECTION Process must be used to set up
a projection before this process is used if
AOITYPE ≠ XY
Default Value = XY
Options:
XY

= Rectilinear (northing/easting)
corner coordinates.

XYPROJECTED

= Rectilinear (northing/easting)
corner coordinates; the picture has
rectilinear edges.

LATLONGPROJECTED
= Latitude/Longitude corner
coordinates; the picture has
Latitude/Longitude edges.
DLS/NTS PROJECTED
= Dominion Land Survey (DLS) or
National Topographic Survey
(NTS) of Canada corner
coordinates; the picture has
Latitude/Longitude edges
corresponding to the township,
range, and section values supplied
for picture corners.

Parameters if AOISRCE = USER & AOITYPE = XY or XYPROJECTED

° XMIN

R2003.12.0

D

Minimum x coordinate in data (engineering) units.
Required if AOITYPE = XY or XYPROJECTED,
NEWPICT = NEW, and AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum x coordinate based on the
AOISRCE parameters

Process

25

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

° XMAX

D

Maximum x coordinate in data (engineering) units.
Required if AOITYPE = XY or XYPROJECTED,
NEWPICT = NEW, and AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Maximum x coordinate based on the
AOISRCE parameters

° YMIN

D

Minimum y coordinate in data (engineering) units.
Required if AOITYPE = XY or XYPROJECTED,
NEWPICT = NEW, and AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum y coordinate based on the
AOISRCE parameters

° YMAX

D

Maximum y coordinate in data (engineering) units.
Required if AOITYPE = XY or XYPROJECTED,
NEWPICT = NEW, and AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Maximum y coordinate based on the
AOISRCE parameters

Parameters used if AOISRCE = USER & AOITYPE = LATLONGPROJECTED
MNLONDEG

I

–180

Longitude minimum, in degrees. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

MNLONMIN

I

180

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum longitude degrees defined by
the AOISRCE parameters

–59

Longitude minimum, in minutes. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

MNLONSEC

I

59

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum longitude minutes defined by
the AOISRCE parameters

–59

Longitude minimum, in seconds. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

MXLONDEG

I

59

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = 0

–180

Longitude maximum, in degrees. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

180

R2003.12.0

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Maximum longitude degrees defined by
the AOISRCE parameters

Process

26

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
MXLONMIN

Data
Type
I

Range Description and Default
–59

Longitude maximum, in minutes. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

MXLONSEC

I

59

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Maximum longitude defined by the
AOISRCE parameters

–59

Longitude maximum, in seconds. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

MNLATDEG

I

59

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = 0

–90

Latitude minimum, in degrees. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

MNLATMIN

I

90

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum latitude degrees defined by the
AOISRCE parameters

–59

Latitude minimum, in minutes. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

MNLATSEC

I

59

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Minimum latitude minutes defined by the
AOISRCE parameters

–59

Latitude minimum, in seconds. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

MXLATDEG

I

59

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = 0

–90

Latitude maximum, in degrees. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

MXLATMIN

I

90

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Maximum latitude degrees defined by
the AOISRCE parameters

–59

Latitude maximum, in minutes. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

MXLATSEC

I

59

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = Maximum latitude minutes defined by
the AOISRCE parameters

–59

Latitude maximum, in seconds. Used if AOITYPE =

through LATLONGPROJECTED, NEWPICT = NEW, and

59

R2003.12.0

AOISRCE = USER.
Default Value = 0

Process

27

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for map dimensions

R2003.12.0

XLENGTH

R

Plots size in the x direction, in plotter units (in or cm).
Can be used instead of specifying an x scale.
Recommended for use if PICTYPE = Z-3D, FENCE or
BLOCK.
Default Value = If no projection is active, and if XSCALE
is supplied, then (XLMARGIN +
XRMARGIN) +
(XMAX – XMIN)/XSCALE
or
If no projection is active and if XSCALE is not
supplied, then 30 in or 76.5 cm

YLENGTH

R

Plot size in the y direction, in plotter units (in or cm). Can
be used instead of specifying a y scale. Recommended for
use if PICTYPE = Z-3D, FENCE or BLOCK.
Default Value = If no projection is active, and if YSCALE
is supplied, then (YLMARGIN +
YRMARGIN) +
(YMAX – YMIN)/YSCALE
or
If no projection is active, and if YSCALE is not
supplied, then 30 in or 76.5 cm

XLMARGIN

R

Plot margin to the left of the map, in plotter units (in or
cm).
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

XRMARGIN

R

YBMARGIN

R

Plot margin to the right of the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm
Plot margin below the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 4.0 in or 10.0 cm

YTMARGIN

R

Plot margin above the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

Process

28

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for scaling
SCALTYPE

ABSSCALE

R2003.12.0

Type of scale used for a new picture. SCALTYPE can
only be used if the AOISRCE parameter is set to USER.
See “Valid Combinations” on page 23 for required
parameters using different scale types.
Options:

I

MAPTOGROUND

= Scaling based on ground units
per map unit. This type of
scaling implies that your data
units and AOI are in meters, but
the scale of the map is given as
1" = 1000'. So the associated
input parameters would be:

ABSOLUTE

= Scaling based on number of data
units per map unit, expressed in
the same units. (A dimensionless
number.)

UNITSPERINCH

= Scaling based on the number of
data units per plotter unit (in or
cm) on plotted picture. (Data
units per cm if UNITS =
METRIC using SYSTEM
PARMS Process.)
DATUNITS

= ′METERS′,
data units

MAPUNITS

= ′INCHES′,
map units

GRDUNITS

= ′FEET′,
ground units

ABSSCALE

= 1000.0, relative
scale factor

Scaling factor. It is an absolute scale if SCALTYPE =
ABSOLUTE.
Absolute scale is the ratio of a distance on the map to the
corresponding distance on the surface of the earth
measured in the same units. It is dimensionless. For
example, an absolute scale of 1000 means 1:1000 and can
be 1" = 1000" or 1cm = 1000cm, etc.

Process

29

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MAPGRND

I

Range Description and Default
Scaling factor. It is a relative scale if SCALTYPE =
MAPTOGROUND.
This relative scale is the ratio of a distance on the map and
the corresponding distance on the surface of the earth
measured in different units. For example, a relative scale
of 1000 could mean 1" = 1000mi or 1cm = 1000'm. The
left side of the equation is in map units (MAPUNITS) and
the right side is in ground units (GRDUNITS).
Default Value = 10,000

XSCALE

R

Map scale for the x direction. Number of data units per
inch on the map used if SCALTYPE = UNITSPERINCH.
Default Value = (XMAX – XMIN)/ (XLENGTH –
(XLMARGIN + XRMARGIN))

YSCALE

R

Map scale for the y direction. Number of data units per
inch on the map used if SCALTYPE = UNITSPERINCH.
Default Value = (YMAX – YMIN)/ (YLENGTH –
(YLMARGIN + YRMARGIN))

C*16

Data (engineering) units of the data to plot on the map is
specified in these units. Used if SCALTYPE =
ABSOLUTE or MAPTOGROUND.
Default Value = METERS
Options:

DATUNITS

INCHES
FEET
YARDS
NAUTICAL MILES
STATUTE MILES
MILLIMETERS
CENTIMETERS
METERS
KILOMETERS
US SURVEY FEET

R2003.12.0

Process

30

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

MAPUNITS

C*16

Type of units used to define a picture. Used if
SCALTYPE = MAPTOGROUND. Map unit of measure,
as opposed to ground unit of measure. See “SCALTYPE”
on page 29.
Default Value = INCHES
Options:
Same as DATUNITS

GRDUNITS

C*16

Engineering units to use for plotting the data. Used if
SCALTYPE = MAPTOGROUND. The number of
ground units (GRDUNITS) per 1 map unit (MAPUNITS)
is relative to the map scale (ABSCALE).
Default Value = INCHES
Options:
Same as DATUNITS

Parameters used if AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED
CORNERS

SURVEY

C*4

C*4

NWCORNER C*4

R2003.12.0

Corners used to define the AOI. Used if AOITYPE =
DLS/NTS PROJECTED.
Default Value = NWSE
Options:
NWSE

= North West and South East corners

NESW

= North East and South West corners

NTS survey type. Used if NWCORNER, NECORNER,
SWCORNER, or SECORNER = NTS.
Default Value = NTS
Options:
NTS

= True National Topographic Survey corners

PNGA

= Petroleum & Natural Gas Act corners

System for specifying the North West corner if AOITYPE
= DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS = NWSE.
Default Value = DLS
Options:
DLS

= Dominion Land Survey

NTS

= National Topographic Survey

Process

31

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

SECORNER

C*4

System for specifying the South East corner if AOITYPE
= DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS = NWSE.
Default Value = DLS
Options:
Same as NWCORNER

NECORNER C*4

System for specifying the North East corner if AOITYPE
= DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS = NWSE.
Default Value = DLS
Options:
Same as NWCORNER

SWCORNER C*4

System for specifying the South West corner if AOITYPE
= DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS = NWSE.
Default Value = DLS
Options:
Same as NWCORNER

° NWMERIDN

I

1–6

Meridian number for North West corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS =
NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.

° NWRANGE

I

1–30

Range value for North West corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS =
NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.

° NWTWNSHP

I

° NWSCTION

I

1–126 Township row value for NW corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS =
NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.
1–36 Section value for NW corner. Required if AOITYPE =
DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS = NWSE and
NWCORNER = DLS.

° SEMERIDN

I

1–6

Meridian number for South East corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS =
NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.

° SERANGE

I

1–30

Range value for South East corner. Required if AOITYPE
= DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS = NWSE and
NWCORNER = DLS.

° SETWNSHP

I

1–126 Township row value for SE corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS =
NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.

° SESCTION

I

1–36

Section value for South East corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CORNERS =
NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.

Process

32

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

° NEMERIDN

I

1–6

Meridian number for North East corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS =
NESW and NECORNER = DLS.

° NERANGE

I

1–30

Range value for North East corner. Required if AOITYPE
= DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS = NESW and
NECORNER = DLS.

° NETWNSHP

I

1–126 Township row number for North East corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS =
NESW and NECORNER = DLS.

° NESCTION

I

1–36

Section value for North East corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS =
NESW and NECORNER = DLS.

° SWMERIDN

I

1–6

Meridian number for South West corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS =
NESW and SWCORNER = DLS.

° SWRANGE

I

1–30

Range value for South West corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS =
NESW and SWCORNER = DLS.

° SWTWNSHP

I

1–126 Township row number for South West corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS =
NESW and SWCORNER = DLS.

° SWSCTION

I

1–36

Section value for South West corner. Required if
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS =
NESW and SWCORNER = DLS.

° NWNTS

C*32

String describing North West corner in terms of the NTS
system. Required if AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED
and CORNERS = NWSE and NWCORNER = NTS.

° SENTS

C*32

String describing South East corner in terms of the NTS
system. Required if AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED
and CORNERS = NWSE and SECORNER = NTS.

° NENTS

C*32

String describing North East corner in terms of the NTS
system. Required if AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED
and CORNERS = NESW and NECORNER = NTS.

° SWNTS

C*32

String describing South West corner in terms of the NTS
system. Required if AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED
and CORNERS = NESW and SWCORNER = NTS.

Process

33

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters used if PICTYPE = CROSS-SECTION

° GRIDIN

MFDGRD

° LINEIN

R2003.12.0

C*24

I

Array of up to 10 input grids to use for computing the
AOI for a new cross-section picture. Required if
PICTYPE = CROSS-SECTION.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

C*24

MFDLINE

I

LINENUM

R

Array of up to 10 numbers of MFDs that contains the
input grids, listed in the same position as in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input vertex file that contains the
cross-section baseline. Required if PICTYPE =
CROSS-SECTION.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the baseline vertex file.
Default Value = 0
Line number in the baseline vertex file to use for
cross-section display.
Default Value = 1.0

Process

34

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Picture Assembly
Name

PICTURE ASSEMBLY

Alternate Name ASSM
Function

This process assembles or overlays one input picture onto an output
picture. The Area of Interests (AOIs) and scales of input and output
pictures need not match.
This process is useful for generating index maps and side-by-side
pictures.

Notes

The TOPICT picture’s color table is used in this process.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

FROMZGF

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains FROMPICT.
Default Value = Current graphics file specified by the
PICTURE Process

• FROMPICT

C*80

Name of the picture to use as the source for all or some of
the copied features.

TOZGF

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains TOPICT.
Default Value = Current graphics file specified by the
PICTURE Process

TOPICT

C*80

Name of the output picture.
Default Value = Current picture specified by the
PICTURE Process

DIVIDE

C*20

Method of handling the division of graphics features from
the input picture.
Default Value = MAINTAIN DIVISIONS
Options:
SINGLE FEATURE

= Copy input features into one
feature on output picture

MAINTAIN
DIVISIONS

= Preserve feature distinction
during copy

Process

35

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CUTLINE

C*12

Drawing of a cutline around the map.
Default Value = NO CUTLINE
Options:
CUTLINE

= Draw a cutline

NO CUTLINE

= Do not draw cutline

XLOWLEFT

R

The x position on output picture for the placement of the
lower left corner of input picture, in plotter units (in or
cm).
Default Value = 0.5 in or 1.5 cm

YLOWLEFT

R

The y position on output picture for the placement of the
lower left corner of input picture, in plotter units (in or
cm).
Default Value = 0.5 in or 1.5 cm

° SCALE

R

Scale factor to apply to input picture. Required if
HEIGHT is not supplied.

° HEIGHT

R

Height of copy of input picture on output picture, in
plotter units (in or cm). Required if SCALE is not
supplied.

LGBTYPES

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

I

0–
1000

Array of up to 40 graphics feature types to copy.
One code is assigned to each feature type, unless all
available types are to copy, in which case set LGBTYPES
to zero. See Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes in the
Z-MAP Plus Reference manual for a complete list of
available graphics feature codes.
Default Value = 0, output all features
Range Options:
1–1000

= Output that feature

0

= Output all features

Process

36

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Picture Stats
Name

PICTURE STATS

Alternate Name PIC STATS
Function

This process gathers and displays statistics on a picture.

Example

ZCL can be instructed to write the same file statistics into ZCL Data
Blocks so that other processes have access to this information by
creating three Data Blocks with the ZCL DATA BLOCK process. One
DATA BLOCK must contain 22 Integer locations, the second must
contain 29 Real locations and the third must contain 4 Double
Precision locations. The following is an example of how this is done in
a ZCL command stream:
DATA BLOCK:10,00

C
DATA BLOCK:20,00

C
DATA BLOCK:30,00

C
PICTURE STATS:

R2003.12.0

HOWMANY = 22,
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’,
DATASIZE = 1

/

HOWMANY = 29,
DATATYPE = ’REAL’,
DATASIZE = 1

/

HOWMANY = 4,
DATATYPE = ’REAL’,
DATASIZE = 2

/

ZGFNAME
PICTURE
DBINTG
DBREAL
DBDBLE

=
=
=
=
=

’Z-MAP.ZGF’,
’WELL BASEMAP’,
10,
20,
30
/

Process

37

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

By specifying DBINTG = 10, DBREAL = 20 and DBDBLE = 30 in
the PICTURE STATS process, the user has specified that DATA
BLOCK 10, DATA BLOCK 20 and DATA BLOCK 30 are filled in
the following manner:
For DATA BLOCK 10

Table 2:
Location Information Present
Border type
1
Projection flag
2
Absolute scale
3
UTM reference code
4
Projection code
5
Reference spheroid code
6
Projected units code
7
Minimum longitude, in degrees
8
Minimum longitude, in minutes
9
Minimum longitude, in seconds
10
Maximum longitude, in degrees
11
Maximum longitude, in minutes
12
Maximum longitude, in seconds
13
Minimum latitude, in degrees
14
Minimum latitude, in minutes
15
Minimum latitude, in seconds
16
Maximum latitude, in degrees
17
Maximum latitude, in minutes
18
Maximum latitude, in seconds
19
Hemisphere code
20
Dateline code
21
Spherical radius calculation method
22

R2003.12.0

Process

38

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

For DATA BLOCK 20

Table 3:
Location Information Present
Minimum x value
1
Maximum x value
2
Range of x
3
Map scale, in x direction
4
AOI length, in x direction
5
Left border width
6
Right border width
7
Whole plot length, in x direction
8
Minimum y value
9
Maximum y value
10
Range of y
11
Map scale, in y direction
12
AOI length, in y direction
13
Bottom border width
14
Top border width
15
Whole plot length, in y direction
16
Least standard parallel
17
Greatest standard parallel
18
Reference latitude
19
Scale factor for reference longitude
20
Reference longitude
21
Scale factor for reference longitude
22
False northing
23
False easting
24
Projection coordinates units factor
25
Semi-major axis
26
Semi-minor axis
27
Azimuth of central line (Oblique Mercator projection)
28
Scale factor at origin (Oblique Mercator projection)
29

For DATA BLOCK 30

Table 4:
Location Information Present
Minimum x value
1
Maximum x value
2
Minimum y value
3
Maximum y value
4

R2003.12.0

Process

39

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains the picture to
query. The graphics file must already exist.

• PICTURE

C*80

Name of the picture to obtain statistics for. The picture
must already exist on the graphics file defined by
ZGFNAME.

DBINTG

I

Number of the output integer DATA BLOCK.
The DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is
non-zero and the specified DATA BLOCK exists and is
of type INTEGER. The DATA BLOCK must contain at
least 21 locations.
Default Value = 0

DBREAL

I

Number of the output real DATA BLOCK.
The DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is
nonzero and the specified DATA BLOCK exists and is of
type REAL. The DATA BLOCK must contain at least 29
locations.
Default Value = 0

DBDBLE

I

Number of the output double precision DATA BLOCK.
The DATA BLOCK is filled only if this parameter is
nonzero and the specified DATA BLOCK exists, is of
type REAL, and DATASIZE = 2. The DATA BLOCK
must contain at least 4 locations.
Default Value = 0

Process

40

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Point Gridding
Name

POINT GRIDDING

Alternate Name P GRD
Function

This process calculates a grid from a set of control points. A previously
built grid (control grid) and/or fault file can be used to control the
gridding process.
Control is allowed for:

• selecting from a variety of gridding algorithms and post grid
processing algorithms
• specifying the grid interval for the Area of Interest (AOI)
• controlling which data are used when calculating a node value
• specifying whether to use data beyond the Area of Interest
(AOI)
Parameters
Parameter
Name
• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

INFLD

I

FAULTS
MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default
Name of the input control point file.
0–5

Field number of the control point field in the input control
point file.
Default Value = First Z Value field

C*24
I

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0

Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output grid file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1

Process

41

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

METHOD

C*16

Range Description and Default
Gridding method.
Default Value = LEAST SQUARES
Options:
LEAST SQUARES

= Moving least squares

PROJECTED SLOPES

= Projected slopes

WEIGHTED
AVERAGE

= Moving weighted averages

CLOSEST POINT

= Closest point

DISTANCE

= Distance to closest point

ISOPACH

= Isopach

BOUNDED RANGE

= Bounded range

LINEAR TREND

= Moving linear trend

MOVING PLATE

= Moving plate model

BLIMIT

R

Boundary tolerance.
Any point that falls in the z value bounded range and is
also in BLIMIT of one of the boundaries is treated as if it
were at that boundary. Used if METHOD = BOUNDED
RANGE.
Default Value = 0.0

COMPRESS

R

Proximity of boundary contour (the zero contour in the
case of isopach gridding) to data points with boundary
values as opposed to those inside the bounded range.
Used if METHOD = ISOPACH or BOUNDED RANGE.
The smaller the value, the closer the contour is to the data
points with boundary values. A value of 0.0 causes the
contour to pass through them. A value of 2.0 causes the
contour to fall approximately halfway between the data
points.
Default Value = 2.0

Process

42

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DATATYPE C*8

Range Description and Default
Whether the input data has gradient information with each
data point. Used if METHOD = PROJECTED SLOPES.
Default Value = NORMAL
Options:
NORMAL

= Data does not contain gradient
information (X, Y, Z)

EXPANDED

= Data contains gradient information and
weights (X, Y, Z, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, W)

XMIN

R

Minimum x coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum x value of the data

XMAX

R

YMIN

R

Maximum x coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual maximum x value of the data
Minimum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum y value of the data

YMAX

R

Maximum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual maximum y value of the data

XINC

R

Gridding interval of x after refinement occurs.
Default Value = Round number based on:
( XMAX – XMIN ) × ( YMAX – YMIN )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------number of points

R2003.12.0

YINC

R

Increment of y of the grid to create.
Default Value = XINC

ZMIN

R

Minimum z value of the grid (a lower limit for allowable
surface values). Used as the lower bound if METHOD =
BOUNDED RANGE.
Default Value = If CONGRID is specified, ZMIN of
CONGRID
or
If CONGRID is not specified, the minimum
data z value minus 10% of the range in data z
values

Process

43

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

ZMAX

R

Maximum z value of the grid (upper limit for allowable
surface values). Used as the upper bound if METHOD =
ISOPACH or BOUNDED RANGE.
Default Value = If CONGRID is specified, ZMAX of
CONGRID
or
If CONGRID is not specified, the maximum
data z value plus 10% of the range in data z
values

REACH

R

Data collection radius for line endpoints and control
points if a control point file is specified. Points beyond
this distance are not used to calculate the value of the
node.
Default Value = 1 ⁄ 2 * grid diagonal

CONTROL

C*16

Type of control grid. Used if CONGRID is specified.
Default Value = DEFAULT AOI
Options:
PASS

= Pass control grid directly to post grid
logic.

BLANK

= Blank control grid along fault traces.

DEFAULT
AOI

= Default AOI parameters to those of the
control grid.

GRID
ZNONS

= Grid at nodes where control z value is
ZNON. Pass other z values through.

GRID
NON-ZNONS

= Grid at nodes where control z value
is not ZNON.

REGRID FAULTS = Regrid along faults in a control
grid.

R2003.12.0

XEXPAND

R

Distance in x beyond the AOI from which data can be
used. Specified in engineering units.
Default Value = 0.0

YEXPAND

R

Distance in y beyond the AOI from which data can be
used. Specified in engineering units.
Default Value = 0.0

Process

44

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

WEIGHT

C*8

Type of weighting function for grid initialization.
Default Value = SHARP
Options:
SHARP

= This gives very large weights to close data.
This type of weighting should be used
unless you are dealing with very rough
(noisy) data.

SMOOTH

= This produces a smooth grid from rough or
noisy data. However, the results do not
necessarily honor the data.

MINPTS

I

1–8

Minimum total number of points in area around a grid
node used to compute a grid value.
Default Value = 1

PERSECT

I

1–8

Maximum number of points per octant used to compute a
grid value.
Default Value = 4

MINSECT

I

1–8

Minimum number of octants in the collection circle that
are required to contain at least one data point in order to
compute a grid value.
Default Value = 1

FORCE

R

FLEXTYPE

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

C*12

Distance to extrapolate grid values beyond the data.
Values are always calculated up to this distance and can
be calculated even further.
Default Value = 0.5 * grid diagonal
Type of grid flexing algorithm.
Default Value = BIHARMONIC
Options:
BIHARMONIC

= Biharmonic flexing

LAPLACIAN

= Laplacian flexing

COMBINATION

= Combination of Biharmonic and
Laplacian

NONE

= No flexing is desired

Process

45

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

CUTOFF

R

Termination criterion for grid flexing.
This is the maximum normalized rate of change of the
overall surface smoothness from one flexing pass to the
next. Flexing terminates if the change is less than
CUTOFF, and NUMPASS is greater than 0.
Default Value = 0.25

REFINE

I

Number of times to refine the grid between passes of the
flexing filter; used only if FLEXTYPE is not equal to
NONE.
Each refinement halves the grid increments and
interpolates intermediate grid values. The order of
refining is flex, refine, flex, refine, . . ., flex.
Default Value = 0, if fault file or METHOD = CLOSEST
POINT
or
1, otherwise

NUMPASS

I

Maximum number of flexing passes.
If the number is negative, then ABS (NUMPASS) flexing
passes are performed regardless of the value of CUTOFF.
If the number is positive, then NUMPASS is the upper
limit on the number of flexing passes.
Default Value = 10

FLEXCTRL

C*16

Termination method for flexing.
Default Value = FLEX<=NUMPASS
Options:
FLEX=NUMPASS

= Causes flexing to occur
NUMPASS times without
regard to CUTOFF.

FLEX<=NUMPASS

= Causes flexing to occur a
maximum of NUMPASS
times. A grid curvature change
of less than CUTOFF
terminates flexing.

Process

46

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SMOOTH

R

CONGRID

C*24

MFDGRID

I

REPORT

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default
0.0–
1.0

Smoothing modulus for flexing; there is a trade-off
between smoothing and honoring the data.
A value of 0 results in a strict fit to the original grid,
without concern for smoothness. A value of 1 produces
the smoothest grid, without concern for a precise fit to the
original grid.
Default Value = 0.2
Name of the input control grid.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the control grid.
Default Value = 0
Extent of the Processing Analysis Report.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE

= No report

PARTIAL

= Summary report

FULL

= Full report

DXFLD

I

Field number of the DZ/DX field in the control point file.
Used if DATATYPE = EXPANDED.
Default Value = First DZ/DX field

DYFLD

I

Field number of the DZ/DY field in the control point file.
Used if DATATYPE = EXPANDED.
Default Value = First DZ/DY field

WGTFLD

I

Field number for the Weight field in the control point file.
Used if DATATYPE = EXPANDED.
Default Value = First field of the correct type

Process

47

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Point Grid Plus
Name

POINT GRID PLUS

Alternate Name THROW GRIDDING
Function

This process performs a more powerful version of point gridding.
Unlike the POINT GRIDDING Process, POINT GRID PLUS can
recognize and use optional throw, dip, and heave information provided
with faults.
Point Grid Plus can be used without faults, or with faults in the
standard X, Y, SEG ID format familiar to most users. In this case, the
module performs very similarly to Point Gridding. If used in this way,
the correct output grid file is GRIDOUT.
Input fault files should consist of single center line fault traces; these
traces can be expanded into fault polygons by this module. Control
points on one side of a fault trace can be used to initialize a grid node
on the other side of the trace after the z value of the control point is
adjusted for the fault throw.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

° DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

CONGRID

C*24

MFDCON

I

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the control point data file to grid. It is optional if
CONTROL = FLEX ONLY; it is ignored if CONTROL =
FAULTS ONLY; otherwise it is required.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input control grid.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the control grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input center line
fault file.
Default Value = 0

Process

48

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FLTPOLY

C*24

MFDPOLY

I

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

INTFTOUT

C*24

MFDINTFT

I

Range Description and Default
Name of input pre-computed fault polygon file for fault
face blanking and creation of fault face filled grid, to use
in place of program computed fault polygon file.
Note: Only one of the two parameters EXPFTOUT or
FLTPOLY can be nonblank during a single run.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Name of the output grid. This grid ties to the center line
fault traces.
0–5

R2003.12.0

I

EXPFTOUT

C*24

Number of the MFD that contains the output grid that
matches the center line fault traces.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output center line fault file, which has had
any ZNONs in the throw and/or dip angle fields replaced
by linearly interpolated values.
In order to output this file, the input fault file must have a
throw and/or dip angle field.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

BLKGROUT C*24

MFDBLKGR

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault polygon
file.
Default Value = 0

Number of the MFD to contain the output center line fault
file with any ZNONs replaced in the throw and/or dip
angle fields.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output grid that has been modified so that the
surface is blanked inside the expanded fault zones.
In order to output this file, the input center line fault file
must contain both a throw and a dip angle field.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid that is
blanked inside the expanded fault zone.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output expanded fault file. In order to output
this file, the input center line fault file must contain both a
throw and a dip angle field.
Note: Only one of the two parameters EXPFTOUT or
FLTPOLY can be nonblank during a single run.
Default Value = Blank

Process

49

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

MFDEXPFT

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the expanded fault file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output grid that has been modified so that the
surface inside the expanded fault zone is defined
according to the throw and dip information.
In order to output this file, the center line fault file must
contain both a throw and a dip angle field.
Default Value = Blank

FILGROUT

C*24

MFDFILGR

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid with a
defined surface inside the expanded fault zone.
Default Value = 1

PROFOUT

C*24

MFDPROF

I

DATAOUT

C*24

MFDDATA

I

DATXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the control point file.
Default Value = First X field in the file

DATYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the control point file.
Default Value = First Y field in the file

DATZFLD

I

Field number of the z field in the control point file.
Default Value = First Z Value field in the file

Name of the output data file that contains profiles along
the expanded fault traces.
In order to output this file, the center line fault file must
contain both a throw and a dip angle field.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output profile data file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output data file to contain the data actually
used to create the grid. The content varies depending on
the type of gridding.
For example, in isopach gridding data points in input data
file with zero (0) value appear in output data file with
program computed negative values. In projected slope
gridding, output data file includes calculated fields
holding DZ/DX and DZ/DY. In all cases, input data
points with null values and data points too far outside the
extrapolated grid AOI are eliminated.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid data file.
Default Value = 1

Process

50

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

DATDXFLD

I

Field number of the DZ/DX field in the control point file.
Used if METHOD = PROJECTED SLOPES.
To use this field, set DATATYPE = EXPANDED,
otherwise the gradient information is calculated based
solely upon the x,y,z information in the control point file.
Default Value = First DZ/DX field in the file

DATDYFLD

I

Field number of the DZ/DY field in the control point file.
Used if METHOD = PROJECTED SLOPES.
To use this field, set DATATYPE = EXPANDED;
otherwise the gradient information is calculated based
solely upon the x,y,z information in the control point file.
Default Value = First DZ/DY field in the file

DATWTFLD

I

Field number of the Gradient Weight field in the control
point file. Used if METHOD = PROJECTED SLOPES.
To use this field, set DATATYPE = EXPANDED.
The values in this field must lie between 0.0 and 1.0. If it
is equal to 1.0 for a control point, then the gradient used
for that control point is the one taken from the file. If it is
equal to 0.0, then the gradient used is calculated by the
Projected Slopes pre-processor.
Default Value = First Gradient Weight field in the file

FLTXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the input center line fault
file.
Default Value = First X field

FLTYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the input center line fault
file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the center line
fault file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

FLTTFLD

I

Field number of the computed Throw field in the input
center line fault file. There need not be a throw field in the
center line fault file.
Note: If there is a throw and a heave field on the file, then
the heave field is used.
Default Value = First Throw field

Process

51

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

FLTAFLD

I

Field number of the computed Dip Angle field in the
input center line fault file. There need not be a dip angle
field in the center line fault file.
Default Value = First Dip Angle field

FLTHFLD

I

Field number for Heave field in fault file.
Note: If there is a throw and heave field on the file, then
the heave field is used.
Default Value = First Heave field

METHOD

C*16

Gridding method.
Default Value = LEAST SQUARES
Options:
LEAST SQUARES

= Moving least squares

PROJECTED SLOPES

= Projected slopes

WEIGHTED
AVERAGE

= Moving weighted averages

CLOSEST POINT

= Closest point

DISTANCE

= Distance to closest point

RANDOM CLOSE PNT = Randomized closest point

R2003.12.0

ISOPACH

= Isopach

BOUNDED RANGE

= Bounded range

POINT DENSITY

= Point density

KRIGING

= Kriging

Process

52

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CONTROL

C*16

Range Description and Default
Type of control grid. Default grid AOI and grid
increments for the output grid are set to those of the
control grid used.
If CONTROL=DEFAULT AOI, the parameters REACH,
XEXPAND and YEXPAND are also defaulted to those of
the control grid.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE

= No control grid used.

FLEX ONLY

= Flex control grid using specified input
control points and faults as constraints

FAULTS
ONLY

= Process the input center line fault file
against the control grid to create the
specified output faults and/or profile
files; no input control point data is
required.

DEFAULT AOI = Default the output grid AOI, grid
increments, XEXPAND, YEXPAND,
REACH, and EXTRAP to those of the
control grid.
GRID ZNONS

= Any ZNON grid nodes in the control
grid are replaced by values determined
using:
• specified gridding parameters
• input control points
• faults
No non-ZNON grid nodes are altered.

GRID NON-ZNONS = Any non-ZNON grid nodes in the
control grid are replaced by
values determined using:
• specified gridding parameters
• input control points
• faults
No ZNON grid nodes are altered

XMIN

R2003.12.0

R

Minimum x coordinate of the grids to create.
Default Value = XMIN of the control grid if one is
provided
or
Computed from input data

Process

53

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

XMAX

R

Maximum x coordinate of the grids to create.
Default Value = XMAX of the control grid if one is
provided
or
Computed from input data

YMIN

R

Minimum y coordinate of the grids to create.
Default Value = YMIN of the control grid if one is
provided
or
Computed from input data

YMAX

R

Maximum y coordinate of the grids to create.
Default Value = YMAX of the control grid if one is
provided
or
Computed from input data

XINC

R

Grid increment in the x direction for the grids to create.
Default Value = XINC of the control grid if one is
provided
or
Computed from input data

YINC

R

Grid increment in the y direction for the grids to create.
Default Value = YINC of the control grid if one is
provided,
or
XINC, otherwise, which is computed from the
input data

REACH

R

Radius of the data collection circle.
Default Value = 1 ⁄ 2 * grid diagonal

ZMIN

R

Minimum z value for the grids to create.
Default Value = Minimum z of the control points minus
10% of their range

ZMAX

R

Maximum z value for the grids to create.
Default Value = Maximum z of the control points plus
10% of their range

UPZBND

R

Upper bound in z of the bounded range. Used if
METHOD = BOUNDED RANGE.
Default Value = 1.0

Process

54

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LOWZBND

R

Lower bound in z of the bounded range. Used if
METHOD = BOUNDED RANGE.
Default Value = 0.0

BLIMIT

R

Boundary tolerance.
Any point that falls in the z value bounded range and is
also in BLIMIT of one of the boundaries is treated as if it
were at that boundary. Used if METHOD = BOUNDED
RANGE.
Default Value = 0.0

XEXPAND

R

Distance in x beyond the AOI from which data can be
used. Specified in engineering units.
Default Value = 0.0

YEXPAND

R

Distance in y beyond the AOI from which data can be
used. Specified in engineering units.
Default Value = 0.0

DATATYPE C*8

MAXCROSS

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default

Whether the input data has gradient information with each
data point. Used if METHOD = PROJECTED SLOPES.
Default Value = NORMAL
Options:
NORMAL

= Data does not contain gradient
information
(X, Y, Z)

EXPANDED

= Data contains gradient information and
weights (X, Y, Z, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, W)

Maximum allowed number of faults that cross the line
drawn between a data point and a grid node in order for
that data point to use in calculating a value at that grid
node.
Default Value = 2

Process

55

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
COMPRESS

WEIGHT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

R

How close the boundary contour (the zero contour in the
case of isopach gridding) lies to data points with
boundary values as opposed to those inside the bounded
range. Used if METHOD = ISOPACH or BOUNDED
RANGE.
The smaller the value, the closer the contour is to the data
points with boundary values. A value of 0.0 causes the
contour to pass through them. A value of 2.0 causes the
contour to fall approximately halfway between the data
points.
Default Value = 2.0

C*12

Type of weighting used in grid initialization.
Default Value = SMOOTH, if METHOD =
WEIGHTED AVERAGE
or
SHARP, otherwise
Options:
SHARP

= Weight assigned to a data point used to
estimate a value for a grid node drops off
sharply with distance

SMOOTH

= Weight assigned to a data point used to
estimate a value for a grid node drops off
more gradually with distance

UNIFORM

= All data points used to estimate a value are
assigned the same weight

MINPTS

I

1–64

Minimum total number of points in the collection circle
around a grid node required to compute a grid value.
Default Value = 1

PERSECT

I

1–8

Maximum number of points per octant used to compute a
grid value.
Default Value = 4

MINSECT

I

1–8

Minimum number of octants in the collection circle that
are required to contain at least one data point in order to
compute a grid value.
Default Value = 1

Process

56

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Range Description and Default

EXTRAP

R

If a grid value cannot be computed based upon the values
provided for MINPTS, PERSECT and MINSECT, but
there are data points in EXTRAP of the grid nodes, then a
grid value is calculated.
Default Value = Same value as REACH

REFINE

I

Number of grid refinements.
Default Value = 1, if a non-faulted grid is used, which is
created using flexing with no control grid or a
DEFAULT AOI control grid
or
0, if METHOD = CLOSEST POINT,
DISTANCE, POINT DENSITY, or RANDOM
CLOSEST PNT

FLEXTYPE

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*12

SMOOTH

R

CUTOFF

R

Type of grid flexing algorithm.
Default Value = NONE, if METHOD = CLOSEST
POINT, DISTANCE, POINT DENSITY, or
RANDOM CLOSEST PNT
or
BIHARMONIC, otherwise
Options:

0.0–
1.0

BIHARMONIC

= Biharmonic flexing

LAPLACIAN

= Laplacian flexing

COMBINATION

= Combination of Biharmonic and
Laplacian

NONE

= No flexing is desired

Smoothness modulus for flexing; there is a trade-off
between smoothing and honoring the data.
A value of 0 results in a strict fit to the original grid,
without concern for smoothness. A value of 1 produces
the smoothest grid, without concern for a precise fit to the
original grid.
Default Value = 0.2
Termination criterion for grid flexing.
This is the maximum normalized rate of change of the
overall surface smoothness from one flexing pass to the
next. Flexing terminates if the change is less than
CUTOFF and NUMPASS is greater than 0.
Default Value = 0.25

Process

57

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

NUMPASS

I

REPORT

ZNON

C*8

R

DEGORRAD C*8

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Maximum number of flexing passes.
If the number is negative, then ABS (NUMPASS) flexing
passes are performed regardless of the value of CUTOFF.
If the number is positive, then NUMPASS is the upper
limit on the number of flexing passes.
Default Value = 10
Extent of the Processing Analysis Report.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
NONE

= No report

PARTIAL

= Summary report

FULL

= Full report

Null data value for the output grid file.
Default Value = ZNON of the z field being gridded
Units in which the dip angle of the fault is measured.
Default Value = DEGREES
Options:
DEGREES

= Dip angle is measured in degrees

RADIANS

= Dip angle is measured in radians

AIM

R

Direction of the major axis of the 2D Kriging
semivariogram. Used if METHOD = KRIGING.
Alternatively, the direction of a surface trend to honor in
other types of gridding. Measured clockwise from North.
Default Value = 0.0

RATIO

R

Ratio of major to minor axis of the 2D Kriging
semivariogram. Semivariogram defined along minor axis
is stretched by RATIO in direction AIM. Used if
METHOD = KRIGING.
Alternatively, the relative strength of the surface trend to
honor in other types of gridding.
Default Value = 1.0

Process

58

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

NUGGET

R

Range Description and Default
Semivariogram nugget, often referred to in the literature
as C0. Used if METHOD = KRIGING.
Default Value = 0.0

° SIL

R

Semivariogram sill parameter, also referred to in the
literature as C. Required if METHOD = KRIGING.

° RANGE

R

Semivariogram range parameter. Required if METHOD =
KRIGING.

XBLOCK

R

Block dimension in x direction for use during Kriging. If
zero, then point Kriging. Used if METHOD = KRIGING.
Note: Both XBLOCK and YBLOCK should be zero or
both should be nonzero.
Default Value = 0.0

YBLOCK

R

Block dimension in y direction for use during Kriging. If
zero, then point Kriging. Used if METHOD = KRIGING.
Note: Both XBLOCK and YBLOCK should be zero or
both should be nonzero.
Default Value = 0.0

AIMUNIT

C*8

HULLFILE

C*24

MFDHULL

I

° ERRESTM

R2003.12.0

C*24

Units of direction of 2D Kriging semivariograms or the
direction of the trend bias in any other type of gridding.
Used if METHOD = KRIGING.
Default Value = DEGREES
Options:
DEGREES

= Direction of semivariogram is in
degrees.

RADIANS

= Direction of semivariogram is in
radians.

Name of the optional output file to contain the polygon(s)
bounding the grid nodes that are assigned values during
gridding. Used only if DATAHULL = CONVEX HULL,
CONCAVE HULL 1 or CONCAVE HULL 2.
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output data hull file.
Default Value = 1
Name of output Kriging error grid. Required if METHOD
= KRIGING.

Process

59

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
MFDERROR

° SEMIVARO

Data
Type
I

Range Description and Default
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output Kriging error
file.
Default Value = 1
Type of semivariogram model to use.
Default Value = SPHERICAL
Options:
SPHERICAL

= C0 + C[(3H/2R) – (H3/2R3)], for
H<R
= C0 + C, for H ≥ R

LINEAR

= C0 + C * H

EXPONENTIAL

= C0 + C[1 – exp(–H/R)]

GAUSSIAN

= C0 + C[1 – exp(–H2/R2)]

Key:
C0 = Nugget value (NUGGET)
H = Distance from the grid node to the control point
R = Range (RANGE)
C = Slope or sill level, depending on model chosen
(SIL)

R2003.12.0

Process

60

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
DATAHULL

Data
Type

Range Description and Default
Algorithm used to determine which grid nodes get
initialized.
Default Value = DATA DISTRIBUTION
Options:
DATA
DISTRIBUTION

= Choice of nodes to initialize
depends on satisfying general
parameters such as number of
points in reach, number of
points, per octant, etc.; this
method is similar to that used
in old point gridding

CONVEX HULL

= Compute the convex hull of the
data, expand that hull by
EXTRAP, and grid all nodes
inside the expanded hull that
are with REACH of at least
one data point

CONCAVE HULL 1

= Compute the convex hull of the
data, determine small
concavities in that hull by
rolling a ball around it of
radius RADIUS, expand that
hull by EXTRAP, and grid all
nodes inside the expanded hull
that are in REACH of at least
one data point

CONCAVE HULL 2

= Compute the convex hull of the
data, determine concavities in
that hull by rolling a ball
around it of radius RADIUS,
expand that hull by EXTRAP,
and grid all nodes inside the
expanded hull that are in
REACH of at least one data
point

Note: Concavities in CONCAVE HULL 2 are larger than
the concavities computed using CONCAVE
HULL 1.

R2003.12.0

Process

61

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

° RADIUS

FLEXCTRL

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
R

C*16

Range Description and Default
Radius of a ball rolled around the convex hull of the input
data to determine concavities of that hull. Required if
DATAHULL = CONCAVE HULL 1 or CONCAVE
HULL 2.
Termination method for flexing.
Default Value = FLEX<=NUMPASS
Options:
FLEX=NUMPASS

= Causes flexing to occur
NUMPASS times without
regard to CUTOFF

FLEX<=NUMPASS

= Causes flexing to occur a
maximum of NUMPASS times;
a grid curvature change of less
than CUTOFF terminates
flexing

Process

62

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Polygon Clip
Name

POLYGON CLIP

Alternate Name CLIP POLYGON
Function

This process performs operations on polygons, including union,
intersection and subtraction.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• POLYIN1
MFDPOLY1

POLYIN2
MFDPOLY2

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24
I

Name of the first input polygon file.
0–5

C*24
I

POLYOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

OPNAME

C*12

Number of the MFD that contains the first input polygon
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the second input polygon file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the second input
polygon file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output polygon file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output polygon file.
Default Value = 1
Operation to perform on the polygon file(s).
Default Value = INTERSECTION
Options:
INTERSECTION

= Intersect each polygon

UNION

= Union each polygon

SUBTRACT

= Subtract each polygon (POLYIN1 –
POLYIN2)

XFLD1

I

Field number of the x field in the first input polygon file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD1

I

Field number of the y field in the first input polygon file.
Default Value = First Y field

Process

63

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

IDFLD1

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the first input
polygon file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

XFLD2

I

Field number of the x field in the second input polygon
file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD2

I

Field number of the y field in the second input polygon
file.
Default Value = First Y field

IDFLD2

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the second input
polygon file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

Process

64

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Data
Name

POST DATA

Alternate Name DATA POSTING
Function

This process posts a symbol and specified field valu(s)e at each control
point location, such as a well or a bore hole. The frequency for posting
and labeling is variable, as is the position of the posted field relative to
the symbol.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• DATAIN

C*24

Name of the posting file.

MFDIN

I

INFLD

I

Array of up to 12 field numbers of the fields to post. At
least one is needed if LABLRATE is not 0.
Default Value = First Z Value field

SYMBOL

I

Default symbol to post; ignored if a symbol field is on the
file. See Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns in
the Z-MAP Plus Reference manual for available symbols.
Default Value = 1, a cross

POSTRATE

I

Rate for posting control points. Every POSTRATEth
point is posted; if POSTRATE = 1, all points are posted.
Default Value = 1

LABLRATE

I

Rate for labeling posted points. Every LABLRATEth
posted point is labeled; if LABLRATE = 0, no points are
labeled.
If LABLRATE is zero, then you do not need to specify
INFLD, LOCATION, NDECIMAL, LABLSIZE, or
ZNON.
Default Value = 1

SYMBSIZE

R

Symbol height, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

Process

65

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LOCATION

C*8

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 12 locations of field labels relative to the
posted symbol, in the same position as the field to post
from INFLD.
A maximum of five separate fields can be stacked at each
location, up to a combined maximum of 12 fields.
Default Value = ABOVE
Options:
ABOVE

= Post label above the symbol

BELOW

= Post label below the symbol

RIGHT

= Post label to the right of the symbol

LEFT

= Post label to the left of the symbol

CENTERED

= Center the label at the well location.
This is usually only used if no symbol
is posted. Post only one field label at
this location.

LABLSIZE

R

Array of up to 12 heights of labels posted, in plotter units
(in or cm) in the same position as the field to post from
INFLD.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

NDECIMAL

I

Array of up to 12 numbers of decimal places to post, in
the same position as the field to post from INFLD.
Default Value = 0

ZNON

R

Array of up to 12 ZNONs (null values), in the same
position as the field to post from INFLD.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

Process

66

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Data New
Name

POST DATA NEW

Alternate Name DATA POSTING NEW
Function

Enhanced posting of data, lines and wells. Data that can be posted
include control points, faults, polylines (vertex) and deviated well files.
This process improves on the POST LINES Process by allowing data
to post along the lines. Selective posting has been added and the size
and color options for lines, symbols and labels have been greatly
enhanced. A method for plotting a scale with ticks and labels along the
lines has been provided. Line type has been expanded to include a
pattern table and ways to vary line pattern by z field. Symbol rotation
has also been added.
The capability of the POST DATA Process has been improved by
allowing selective posting of data, expanding options for symbol size,
and introducing multiple options for color choice for symbols and
labels. Choice of fonts has also been added and bubble map parameters
are found in this portion of the process.
The well posting ability of this process handles deviated and
nondeviated wells. For posting deviated wells, both the line and data
posting portions of the process are involved. There is a selective
posting function for primary and secondary lines (well traces). A scale
with ticks and labels can be plotted along the well traces.

Notes

Z-MAP Plus allows selective line posting only in POST DEVIATED
WELLS. ZCL allows selective line posting for any line, for example,
posting lease block outlines with two sets of line parameters
corresponding to two owners.
For calculated defaults, a “nice” number is a power of ten times 1, 2,
2.5, 4 or 5.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

MFDIN

I

XFLD

I

Name of input file to post.
Range Options:
Data, fault, vertex and deviated well files
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Field number of x field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

Process

67

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

YFLD

I

SEGIDFLD

I

WELLFLD

I

CLIPMODE

UNITS

Range Description and Default
Field number of y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field
Field number of the Segment ID field. If the file is a
deviated well file, then it must have this field; otherwise
this field is optional. See PSTMODET.
Default Value = First Seg ID field
Field number of the Well Name or Platform Identifier
field. If the file is a deviated well file, then it must have
this field; otherwise this field is optional.
Default Value = First Well Name or Platform Identifier
field

C*8

Clipping of data outside the AOI border.
Default Value = CLIP
Options:

C*8

CLIP

= Do not display the data outside the border.

NOCLIP

= Display the data outside the border.

Units for the coordinates of the points.
Default Value = USER
Options:
PLOTTER

= Plotter units (in or cm)

USER

= Engineering or user coordinates (feet/
meter)

Parameters for posting top data
NUMFLDT

° TOPFLDS

R2003.12.0

I
I

0–12

Number of fields to post at top locations.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 12 field numbers for the fields to post at the
top locations. May be of any type. Required if
NUMFLOT > 0.
Default Value = None

Process

68

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for posting top data symbols
PSTMODET C*8

SLCTTFLD

I

PSTRATET

I

SYMMODET C*8

R2003.12.0

Posting mode for top locations. For control points without
SEG ID, all points are treated as tops; without SEG ID,
choose OMIT.
Default Value = OMIT
Options:
ALL

= Post all top locations

SELECT

= Posts top locations where field SLCTTFLD
is defined

OMIT

= Do not post at top locations

Field number of the select field for posting at top
locations. Values are posted only at locations where this
field is defined. Used if PSTMODET = SELECT.
Default Value = First Z Value field
Posting rate for top locations. For example, if PSTRATET
= 5, every 5th top location is posted.
Default Value = 1
Determine symbol to post at top locations.
Default Value = NUMBER
Options:
NUMBER

= Use symbol number given by SYMNUMT

FIELD

= Use symbol code field given by
SYMTFLD

OMIT

= Do not post symbol

SYMNUMT

I

Number of the symbol to post at top location. Used if
SYMMODET = NUMBER.
Default Value = 1

SYMTFLD

I

Field number for the symbol code field used to determine
the symbol to post at the top locations. Used if
SYMMODET = FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Code field

Process

69

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for size of posted top symbols
SIZMODET

C*8

Method for determining the top symbol size.
Default Value = VALUE
Options:
VALUE

= Use size of symbol given by SYMSIZET.

FIELD

= Use size field given by SIZTFLD.

CLASS

= Use vary by z field given by ZSIZTFLD to
vary symbol size. Size is determined by table
ZCLSMXTS, SZINCT, CLSLEVT,
ZCLSMINT.

AREA

= Use vary by z field given by ZSIZTFLD to
vary symbol size.
SIZE =
4
--- SZSCALET ( field value × SZOFFSTT )
π

DIAMETER

= Use vary by z field given by ZSIZTFLD
to vary symbol size.
SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTT) *
SZSCALET

R2003.12.0

SYMSIZET

R

Size of symbol posted at top locations, in plotter units
(in or cm). Used if SIZMODET = VALUE.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

SIZTFLD

I

Field number for the symbol size field used to determine
the size of the symbol to post at the top locations. Used if
SIZMODET = FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Size field

ZSIZTFLD

I

Field number for the z field used to vary the size of the top
symbols. Used if SIZMODET = DIAMETER, AREA or
CLASS.
Default Value = First Z Value field

Process

70

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SZOFFSTT

R

Range Description and Default
Offset for top symbol size calculation. Used if
SIZMODET = DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTT) * SZSCALET
For area: SIZE =

4
--- SZSCALET ( field value × SZOFFSTT )
π

Default Value = –0.99999 * minimum data value
SZSCALET

R

Scale for top symbol size calculation. Used if
SIZMODET = DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTT) * SZSCALET
For area: SIZE =

4
--- SZSCALET ( field value × SZOFFSTT )
π

Default Value = 0.25/data range
SZMINT

R

Minimum size of symbol to post at tops, in plotter units
(in or cm). Used if SIZMODET = DIAMETER, AREA or
CLASS.
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

SZMAXT

R

Maximum size of symbol to post at tops, in plotter units
(in or cm). Used if SIZMODET = DIAMETER or AREA.
Default Value = 0.25 in or 0.65 cm

SZINCT

R

Symbol size increment at tops, in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if SIZMODET = CLASS.
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

CLSLEVT

I

ZCLSMINT

R

Minimum z value to post top symbol. Used if SIZMODET
= CLASS.
Default Value = Minimum data value

ZCLSMXTS

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
used to determine the top symbol size. Used if
SIZMODET = CLASS.
Default Value = Data range is divided into CLSLEVT
“nice” intervals

1–6

Number of class intervals for top symbol size. Used if
SIZMODET = CLASS.
Default Value = 2

Parameters for posting top symbol color

R2003.12.0

Process

71

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CLRMODET C*8

Method for defining the color of the symbol at top
locations.
Default Value = INDEX
Options:
INDEX

= Use color index given by SYMCLRT

FIELD

= Use field given by CLRTFLD

Z-FIELD

= Vary color based on z field given by
ZCLRTFLD

SYMCLRT

I

CLRTFLD

I

Field number for the color field used to determine color
for the top symbols. Used if CLRMODET = FIELD.
Default Value = First Color field

ZCLRTFLD

I

Field number for the z field used to vary the color of the
top symbols. Used if CLRMODET = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = First Z Value field

ZTBLMODT C*16

STRTCLRT

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

I

0–255 Color index for symbols at top locations. Used if
CLRMODET = INDEX.
Default Value = 10

Method for defining color divisions. Used if CLRMODET
= Z-FIELD.
Default Value = DIVIDE
Options:
NONE

= User specified; divisions taken from ZCLRTS.

DIVIDE

= Divide the data range into CLRLEVT
divisions. A “nice” starting z value and
increment are calculated.

INCREMENT

= Compute a “nice” starting z
value and increment by
ZINCT.

INCREMENT+START

= Start at ZSTARTT and
increment by ZINCT.

0–255 Starting color index to use to post top symbols. Used if
CLRMODET = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 56

Process

72

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

° ZCLRTS

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

R

Array of up to 50 maximum z values for color indices to
use if posting top symbols. Used if CLRMODET =
Z-FIELD. Required if ZTBLMODT = NONE.

CLRLEVT

I

1–50

Number of color levels to use to post top symbols. Used if
CLRMODET = Z-FIELD and ZTBLMODT = DIVIDE or
NONE.
Default Value = 10

ZINCT

R

Increment to use to change color levels. Used if
ZTBLMODT = INCREMENT or
INCREMENT+START.
Note: Data range/ZINCT ≤50
Default Value = Data range/CLRLEVT

ZSTARTT

R

Starting z value for color change. Used if ZTBLMODT =
INCREMENT+START.
Default Value = Minimum data value

Parameters for posting top data labels
LBCMODTS C*8

R2003.12.0

Array of up to 12 label color modes for posting the fields
at top locations, listed in the same position as the
corresponding field in TOPFLDS.
Default Value = INDEX
Options:
INDEX

= Use color indices given by LBLCLRTS.

FIELD

= Use field given by LCLRTFDS.

SYMBOL

= Use the color of the symbol.

LBLCLRTS

I

0–255 Array of up to 12 color indices for fields posted at top
locations, listed in the same position as the corresponding
label in LBCMODTS. Used if LBCMODTS = INDEX.
Default Value = 5

LCLRTFDS

I

Array of up to 12 field numbers for the color fields to use
to determine color for the top labels, listed in the same
position as the corresponding label in LBCMODTS.Used
if LBCMODTS = FIELD
Default Value = First color field

Process

73

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LBLRATET

I

FONTTS

C*8

Range Description and Default
Label rate for top symbols. For example, if LBLRATET =
5, every 5th top location is labeled.
Default Value = 1
Array of up to 12 font types for posting the fields at top
locations, listed in the same position as the corresponding
label in LBCMODTS.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX

NDECTS

LOCATET

LBLSZTS

R2003.12.0

I

C*8

R

Array of up to 12 values for the number of decimals to
post for the fields at top locations, listed in the same
position as the corresponding field in TOPFLDS.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 12 locations of field labels relative to the
posted symbol, in the same position as the field to post
from TOPFLDS.
A maximum of five separate fields can be stacked at each
location, up to a combined maximum of 12 fields.
Default Value = ABOVE
Options:
ABOVE

= Above the top symbol

BELOW

= Below the top symbol

RIGHT

= Right of the top symbol

LEFT

= Left of the top symbol

CENTERED

= At the well location. Normally this is
used only if no symbol is posted.

Array of up to 12 label sizes for posting the fields at top
locations in plotter units (in or cm), listed in the same
position as the corresponding label in LBCMODTS.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

Process

74

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for posting bottom data
NUMFLDB

I

BOTFLDS

I

0–12

Number of fields to post at bottom locations.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 12 field numbers for the fields to post at the
bottom locations. May be of any type. Used if
NUMFLDB > 0.
Default Value = None

Parameters for posting bottom data symbols
PSTMODEB C*8

Posting mode for bottom locations.
Default Value = OMIT
Options:
ALL

= Post at all bottom locations

SELECT

= Posts at bottom locations where field
SLCTBFLD is defined

OMIT

= Do not post at bottom locations

SLCTBFLD

I

Field number of the select field for posting at bottom
locations. Values are posted only at locations where this
field is defined. Used if PSTMODEB = SELECT.
Default Value = First Z Value field

PSTRATEB

I

Posting rate for bottom locations. For example, if
PSTRATEB = 5, every 5th bottom location is posted.
Default Value = 1

Parameters for size of posted bottom symbols
SYMMODEB C*8

R2003.12.0

Method for determining symbol to post at bottom
locations.
Default Value = NUMBER
Options:
NUMBER

= Use symbol number given by SYMNUMB

FIELD

= Use symbol code field given by SYMBFLD

OMIT

= Do not post symbol

Process

75

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

SYMNUMB

I

Number of the symbol to post at bottom location. Used if
SYMMODEB = NUMBER.
Default Value = 1

SYMBFLD

I

Field number for the symbol code field used to determine
the symbol to post at the bottom locations. Used if
SYMMODEB = FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Code field

SIZMODEB

C*8

Method for determining the bottom symbol size.
Default Value = VALUE
Options:
VALUE

= Use size of symbol given by SYMSIZEB.

FIELD

= Use size field given by SIZBFLD.

CLASS

= Use z field given by ZSIZBFLD to vary
symbol size. Size is determined by table
ZCLSMXBS, SZINCB, CLSLEVB,
ZCLSMINB.

AREA

= Use z field given by ZSIZBFLD to vary
symbol size.
SIZE =
4
--- SZSCALEB ( field value × SZOFFSTB )
π

DIAMETER

= Use z field given by ZSIZBFLD to vary
symbol size.
SIZE = (field value +
SZOFFSTB)SZSCALEB

R2003.12.0

SYMSIZEB

R

Size of symbol posted at bottom locations, in plotter units
(in or cm). Used if SIZMODEB = VALUE.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

SIZBFLD

I

Field number for the symbol size field used to determine
the size of the symbol to post at the bottom locations.
Used if SIZMODEB = FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Size field

ZSIZBFLD

I

Field number for the z field used to vary the size of the
bottom symbols. Used if SIZMODEB = DIAMETER,
AREA or CLASS.
Default Value = First Z Value field

Process

76

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SZOFFSTB

R

Range Description and Default
Offset for bottom symbol size calculation. Used if
SIZMODEB = DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTB)SZSCALEB
For area: SIZE =

4
--- SZSCALEB ( field value × SZOFFSTB )
π

Default Value = –0.99999*minimum data value
SZSCALEB

R

Scale for bottom symbol size calculation. Used if
SIZMODEB = DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTB)SZSCALEB
For area: SIZE =

4
--- SZSCALEB ( field value × SZOFFSTB )
π

Default Value = 0.25/data range

R2003.12.0

SZMINB

R

Minimum size of symbol to post at bottoms, in plotter
units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEB = DIAMETER,
AREA or CLASS.
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

SZMAXB

R

Maximum size of symbol to post at bottoms, in plotter
units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEB = DIAMETER or
AREA.
Default Value = 0.25 in or 0.65 cm

SZINCB

R

Symbol size increment for bottom symbols, in plotter
units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEB = CLASS.
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

CLSLEVB

I

ZCLSMINB

R

Minimum z value to post bottom symbol. Used if
SIZMODEB = CLASS.
Default Value = Minimum data value

ZCLSMXBS

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
used to determine the bottom symbol size. Used if
SIZMODEB = CLASS.
Default Value = Data range is divided into CLSLEVB
“nice” intervals.

1–6

Number of class intervals for bottom symbol size. Used if
SIZMODEB = CLASS.
Default Value = 2

Process

77

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for color of posted bottom symbols
CLRMODEB C*8

INDEX

= Use color index given by SYMCLRB

FIELD

= Use field given by CLRBFLD

Z-FIELD

= Vary color based on z field given by
ZCLRBFLD

SYMCLRB

I

CLRBFLD

I

Field number for the color field used to determine color
for the bottom symbols. Used if CLRMODEB = FIELD.
Default Value = First Color field

ZCLRBFLD

I

Field number for the z field used to vary the color of the
bottom symbols. Used if CLRMODEB = DIAMETER,
AREA or CLASS.
Default Value = First Z Value field

ZTBLMODB C*16

R2003.12.0

Method for defining color of symbols at bottom locations.
Default Value = INDEX
Options:

0–255 Color index for symbols at bottom locations. Used if
CLRMODEB = INDEX.
Default Value = 10

Method for defining color divisions. Used if
CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = DIVIDE
Options:
NONE

= User specified; divisions taken from
ZCLRBS.

DIVIDE

= Divide the data range into CLRLEVB
divisions. A “nice” starting z value and
increment are calculated.

INCREMENT

= Compute a “nice” starting z
value and increment by
ZINCB.

INCREMENT+START

= Start at ZSTARTB and
increment by ZINCB.

Process

78

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

STRTCLRB

I

° ZCLRBS

Range Description and Default
0–255 Starting color index to use to post bottom symbols. Used
if CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 56

R

CLRLEVB

I

ZINCB

R

ZSTARTB

R

Array of up to 50 maximum z values for color indices to
use if posting bottom symbols. Used if CLRMODEB =
Z-FIELD. Required if ZTBLMODB = NONE.
1–50

Number of color levels to use to post bottom symbols.
Used if CLRMODEB = Z-FIELD and ZTBLMODB =
DIVIDE.
Default Value = 10
Increment to use to change color levels. Used if
ZTBLMODB = INCREMENT or
INCREMENT+START.
Note: Data Range/ZINCB ≤50
Default Value = Data Range/CLRLEVB
Starting z value for color change. Used if ZTBLMODB =
INCREMENT+START.
Default Value = Minimum data value

Parameters for posting bottom labels
LBCMODBS C*8

LBLCLRBS

R2003.12.0

I

Array of up to 12 label color modes for posting the fields
at bottom locations, in the same position as the
corresponding field from BOTFLDS.
Default Value = INDEX
Options:
INDEX

= Use color indices given by LBLCLRBS.

FIELD

= Use field given by LCLRBFDS.

SYMBOL

= Use the color of the symbol.

0–255 Array of up to 12 color indices for posting the fields at
bottom locations, in the same position as the
corresponding label from LBCMODBS. Used if
LBCMODBS = INDEX.
Default Value = 6

Process

79

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LCLRBFDS

I

Array of up to 12 field numbers for the color fields to use
to determine color for the bottom labels, in the same
position as the corresponding label from LBCMODBS.
Default Value = First Color field

LBLRATEB

I

Label rate for bottom symbols. For example, if
LBLRATEB = 5, every 5th bottom location is labeled.
Default Value = 1

FONTBS

C*8

Range Description and Default

Array of up to 12 font types for posting the fields at
bottom locations, in the same position as the
corresponding label from LBCMODBS.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX

NDECBS

R2003.12.0

I

Array of up to 12 values for the number of decimals to
post for the fields at bottom locations, in the same position
as the corresponding label from LBCMODBS.
Default Value = 0

Process

80

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LOCATEB

C*8

LBLSZBS

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 12 locations of field labels relative to the
posted symbol, in the same position as the field to post
from BOTFLDS.
A maximum of five separate fields can be stacked at each
location, up to a combined maximum of 12 fields.
Default Value = ABOVE
Options:

R

ABOVE

= Above the bottom symbol

BELOW

= Below the bottom symbol

RIGHT

= Right of the bottom symbol

LEFT

= Left of the bottom symbol

CENTERED

= At the well location. Normally this is used
only if no symbol is posted.

Array of up to 12 label sizes for posting the fields at
bottom locations, in plotter units (in or cm), in the same
position as the corresponding field from BOTFLDS.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

Parameters for posting lines

R2003.12.0

NUMFLDI

I

LINEFLDS

I

0–2

Number of fields to post at line point locations.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 2 field numbers for the fields to post at the
location of points along lines. May be of any type. Used if
NUMFLDI > 0.
Default Value = None

Process

81

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

PSTMODEL C*12

SLCTLFLD

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default
Line posting mode.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= Post all lines using primary line
parameters.

PRIMARY

= Base choice of parameters on
SLCTLFLD. If the value of
SLCTLFLD for the first point on a
line is not null use the primary
parameters for that line. If the first
value is null use the secondary
parameters for that line.

SECONDARY

= Base choice of parameters on
SLCTLFLD. If the value of
SLCTLFLD for the first point on a
line is not null, use the secondary
parameters for that line. If the first
value is null, use the primary
parameters.

Field number of the select field for posting lines. Primary
or secondary posting parameters are used depending on
whether this field is defined. Must be a real valued field.
Used if PSTMODEL = PRIMARY or SECONDARY.
Default Value = First Z Value field

Process

82

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for posting lines if PSTMODEL = PRIMARY
LINETYPE

R2003.12.0

C*12

Type of line to connect points with the same Segment ID.
This is the line type for drawing primary lines. For a
deviated well file, this is the well traces.
Default Value = OMIT
Options:
PATTERN

= Use pattern given by LINEPAT.

SOLID

= Plain solid line.

SINGLE DASH

= Dash 1, gap 1 pattern.

DOUBLE
DASH

= Dash 1, gap 1, dash 2, gap 2 pattern.

TRIPLE DASH

= Dash 1, gap 1, dash 2, gap 2, dash 3,
gap 3 pattern.

HACHURE

= Hachure pattern.

Z-FIELD

= Vary pattern based on z field given by
ZPATLFLD.

OMIT

= Do not draw line.

LINEWGHT

I

1–8

Multiple of normal line width for drawing primary lines.
Default Value = 1

LINEPAT

I

1–20

Pattern number for drawing primary lines. See Appendix
C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus
Reference manual for examples.
Default Value = 1

DASHONE

R

Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the first dash in dash
pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if LINETYPE =
SINGLE DASH, DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

DASHTWO

R

Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the second dash in
dash pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if
LINETYPE = DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.09 in or 0.25 cm

Process

83

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

DASHTHR

R

Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the third dash in dash
pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if LINETYPE =
TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.11 in or 0.30 cm

GAPONE

R

Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the first gap in dash
pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if LINETYPE =
SINGLE DASH, DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

GAPTWO

R

Length, in plotter units (in/cm,) of the second gap in dash
pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if LINETYPE =
DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.09 in or 0.25 cm

GAPTHR

R

Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the third gap in dash
pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if LINETYPE =
TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.11 in or 0.30 cm

HACHLEN

R

Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the hachures in
hachure pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if
LINETYPE = HACHURE.
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

HACHGAP

R

Length, in plotter units (in or cm), of the gap in hachure
pattern for drawing primary lines. Used if LINETYPE =
HACHURE.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

HACHDIR

C*8

Direction of hachures relative to direction of the primary
line. Used if LINETYPE = HACHURE.
Default Value = LEFT
Options:
LEFT

= Draw hachures on relative left side of line.

RIGHT

= Draw hachures on relative right side of line.

Process

84

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for posting lines if PSTMODEL = PRIMARY & LINETYPE = Z-FIELD
ZTBLMODP C*16

ZPATLFLD

I

STRTPAT

I

° ZPATRNS

R2003.12.0

Method for defining line type divisions. Used if
LINETYPE = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = DIVIDE
Options:

I

ZINCP

R

= User specified; divisions taken from
ZPATRNS.

DIVIDE

= Divide the data range into PATLEVS
divisions. A “nice” starting z value and
increment are calculated.

INCREMENT

= Compute a “nice” starting z
value and increment by
ZINCP.

INCREMENT+START

= Start at ZSTARTP and
increment by ZINCP.

Field number for the z field used to vary the pattern used
to draw lines. Used if LINETYPE = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = First Z Value field
1–20

R

PATLEVS

NONE

Starting pattern number to use to draw primary lines. Used
if LINETYPE = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 1
Array of up to 20 maximum z values for line patterns to
use if drawing primary lines. Used if LINETYPE =
Z-FIELD. Required if ZTBLMODP = NONE.

1–20

Number of patterns to use to draw primary lines. Used if
LINETYPE = Z-FIELD and ZTBLMODP = DIVIDE.
Default Value = 10
Increment to use to change patterns. Used if
ZTBLMODP = INCREMENT or
INCREMENT+START.
Note: Data Range/ZINCP ≤ 10. If the number of patterns
is greater than 10, then PATLEVS must be
specified.
Default Value = Data range/PATLEVS

Process

85

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

ZSTARTP

R

Range Description and Default
Starting value for pattern change. Used if ZTBLMODP =
INCREMENT+START.
Default Value = Minimum data value

Parameters for posting line colors if PSTMODEL = PRIMARY
CLRMODEL C*8

R2003.12.0

Method for defining the color of the primary lines.
Default Value = INDEX
Options:
INDEX

= Use color index given by LINECLR

FIELD

= Use field given by LINCLFLD

Z-FIELD

= Vary color based on z field given by
ZCLRLFLD

LINECLR

I

0–255 Color index for drawing primary lines. Used if
CLRMODEL = INDEX.
Default Value = 13

CLRLFLD

I

Field number for the color field used to determine the
color for lines. Used if CLRMODEL = FIELD.
Default Value = First Color field

ZCLRLFLD

I

Field number for the z field used to vary the color of lines.
Used if CLRMODEL = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = First Z Value field

Process

86

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for posting line colors if PSTMODEL = PRIMARY & CLRMODEL =
Z-FIELD
ZTBLMODL C*16

STRTCLRL

° ZCLRLS

R2003.12.0

I

Method for defining color divisions. Used if CLRMODEL
= Z-FIELD.
Default Value = DIVIDE
Options:
NONE

= User specified; division taken from ZCLRLS.

DIVIDE

= Divide the data range into CLRLEVL
divisions. A “nice” starting z value and
increment are calculated.

INCREMENT

= Compute a “nice” starting z
value and increment by
ZINCL.

INCREMENT+START

= Start at ZSTARTL and
increment by ZINCL.

0–255 Starting color index to use to draw primary lines. Used if
CLRMODEL = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 56

R

Array of up to 50 maximum z values for color indices to
use when drawing primary lines. Used if CLRMODEL =
Z-FIELD. Required if ZTBLMODL = NONE.

CLRLEVL

I

1–50

Number of color levels to use to draw primary lines. Used
if CLRMODEL = Z-FIELD and ZTBLMODL = DIVIDE.
Default Value = 10

ZINCL

R

Increment to use to change color levels. Used if
ZTBLMODL = INCREMENT or
INCREMENT+START.
Note: Data Range/ZINCL .LE. 50
Default Value = Data range/CLRLEVL

ZSTARTL

R

Starting value for color change. Used if ZTBLMODL =
INCREMENT+START.
Default Value = Minimum data value

Process

87

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for posting lines if PSTMODEL = SECONDARY
LINTYPE2

C*12

Secondary line type parameter. Used if PSTMODEL =
SECONDARY.
Default Value = PRIMARY
Options:
PATTERN

= Use pattern given by LINPAT2

SOLID

= Plain solid line

SINGLE DASH = Dash 1, gap 1 pattern

R2003.12.0

1–20

DOUBLE
DASH

= Dash 1, gap 1, dash 2, gap 2 pattern

TRIPLE DASH

= Dash 1, gap 1, dash 2, gap 2, dash 3,
gap 3 pattern

HACHURE

= Hachure pattern

PRIMARY

= Use primary line pattern parameters

OMIT

= Do not draw line

LINPAT2

I

Line pattern number for secondary lines. See Appendix C.
Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus
Reference manual for examples.
Default Value = 1

DASHONE2

R

Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the first dash in dash
pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if LINTYPE2 =
SINGLE DASH, DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

DASHTWO2

R

Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the second dash in
dash pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if
LINTYPE2 = DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.09 in or 0.25 cm

DASHTHR2

R

Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the third dash in dash
pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if LINTYPE2 =
TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.11 in or 0.30 cm

Process

88

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

GAPONE2

R

Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the first gap in dash
pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if LINTYPE2 =
SINGLE DASH, DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

GAPTWO2

R

Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the second gap in dash
pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if LINTYPE2 =
DOUBLE DASH or TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.09 in or 0.25 cm

GAPTHR2

R

Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the third gap in dash
pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if LINTYPE2 =
TRIPLE DASH.
Default Value = 0.11 in or 0.30 cm

HACHLEN2

R

Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the hachures in
hachure pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if
LINTYPE2 = HACHURE.
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

HACHGAP2

R

Length in plotter units (in or cm) of the gap in hachure
pattern for drawing secondary lines. Used if LINTYPE2 =
HACHURE.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

HACHDIR2

C*8

LINWGHT2

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default

Direction of hachures relative to direction of the
secondary line. Used if LINTYPE2 = HACHURE.
Default Value = LEFT
Options:

1–8

LEFT

= Draw hachures on relative left side of line.

RIGHT

= Draw hachures on relative right side of line.

Multiple of normal line width for drawing secondary
lines.
Default Value = 1

Process

89

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for posting line colors if PSTMODEL = SECONDARY
CLRMODL2 C*8

LINCLR2

I

Method for defining the color of the secondary lines.
Default Value = PRIMARY
Options:
INDEX

= Use color index given by LINCLR2

PRIMARY

= Use same color parameters as for primary
lines

0–255 Color index for drawing secondary lines. Used if
CLRMODE2 = INDEX.
Default Value = 13

Parameters for posting point locations along lines
PSTMODEI

R2003.12.0

C*8

Posting mode for points along lines. For deviated wells,
these are the intermediate points along the well traces. For
faults and vertices, these are all the points. For control
points without SEG ID, all points are treated as tops;
without SEG ID, use OMIT.
Default Value = OMIT
Options:
ALL

= Post symbols at points along lines

SELECT

= Post symbols only if SLCTIFLD is defined

OMIT

= Do not post at points along lines

SLCTIFLD

I

Field number of the select field for posting points along
lines. Values are posted only at locations where this field
is defined. Must be a REAL valued field. Used if
PSTMODEI = SELECT.
Default Value = First Z Value field

PSTRATEI

I

Posting rate for points along lines. For example, if
PSTRATEI = 5, every 5th point along the line is posted.
Default Value = 1

Process

90

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SYMMODEI C*8

Range Description and Default
Determine symbol to post at the location of points along
lines. Used if PSTMODEI = ALL or SELECT.
Default Value = NUMBER
Options:
NUMBER

= Use symbol number given by SYMNUMI

FIELD

= Use symbol code field given by SYMIFLD

OMIT

= Do not post symbol

SYMNUMI

I

Number of the symbol to post at the location of points
along lines. Used if SYMMODEI = NUMBER.
Default Value = 1

SYMIFLD

I

Field number for the symbol code field used to determine
the symbol to post at the location of points along lines.
Used if SYMMODEI = FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Code field

Parameters for size of symbols posted at point locations along lines
SIZMODEI

C*8

Method for determining the size for symbols posted at
points along lines.
Default Value = VALUE
Options:
VALUE

= Use size of symbol given by SYMSIZEI.

FIELD

= Use size field given by SIZIFLD.

CLASS

= Use z field given by ZSIZIFLD to vary
symbol size. Size is determined by table
ZCLSMXIS, SZINCI, CLSLEVI,
ZCLSMINI.

AREA

= Use z field given by ZSIZIFLD to vary
symbol size.
SIZE =
4
--- SZSCALET ( field value × SZOFFSTT )
π

DIAMETER

= Use z field given by ZSIZIFLD to vary
symbol size.
SIZE = (field value +
SZOFFSTI)SZSCALEI

R2003.12.0

Process

91

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

SYMSIZEI

R

Size of symbol posted at the location of points along lines
in plotter units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEI = VALUE.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

SIZIFLD

I

Field number for the symbol size field used to determine
the size of the symbol to post at the location of points
along lines. Used if SIZMODEI = FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Size field

Parameters for size of symbols posted at point locations along lines if SIZMODEI =
DIAMETER, AREA or CLASS
ZSIZIFLD

I

Field number for the z field used to vary the size of the
symbol posted at the location of points along lines. Used
if SIZMODEI = DIAMETER, AREA or CLASS.
Default Value = First Z Value field

SZOFFSTI

R

Offset for symbol size calculation for symbols posted at
the location of points along lines. Used if SIZMODEI =
DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTI)SZSCALEI
For area: SIZE =

4
--- SZSCALET ( field value × SZOFFSTT )
π

Default Value = –0.99999*minimum data value
SZSCALEI

R

Scale for symbol size calculation for symbols posted at
the location of points along lines. Used if SIZMODEI =
DIAMETER or AREA.
For diameter: SIZE = (field value + SZOFFSTI)SZSCALEI
For area: SIZE =

4
--- SZSCALET ( field value × SZOFFSTT )
π

Default Value = 0.25/data range

R2003.12.0

SZMINI

R

Minimum symbol size to post at the location of points
along lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEI
= DIAMETER, AREA or CLASS.
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

SZMAXI

R

Maximum symbol size to post at the location of points
along lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used if SIZMODEI
= DIAMETER or AREA.
Default Value = 0.25 in or 0.65 cm

Process

92

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

CLSLEVI

I

ZCLSMINI

R

Minimum z value to post symbol at the location of points
along lines. Used if SIZMODEI = CLASS.
Default Value = Minimum data value

ZCLSMXIS

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
used to determine the size of symbols at the location of
points along lines. Used if SIZMODEI = CLASS.
Default Value = Data range is divided into CLSLEVI
“nice” intervals

SZINCI

R

Symbol size increment for symbols posted at the location
of points along lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used if
SIZMODEI = CLASS.
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

1–6

Number of class intervals for symbol size of symbol
posted at the location of points along lines. Used if
SIZMODEI = CLASS.
Default Value = 2

Parameters for color of symbols posted at point locations along a line
CLRMODEI

R2003.12.0

C*8

Method for defining the color of the symbol posted at the
location of points along lines.
Default Value = INDEX
Options:
INDEX

= Use color index given by SYMCLRI

FIELD

= Use field given by CLRIFLD

Z-FIELD

= Vary color based on z field given by
ZCLRIFLD

LINE

= Use same color as line

SYMCLRI

I

0–255 Color index for symbols posted at the location of points
along lines. Used if CLRMODEI = INDEX.
Default Value = 8

CLRIFLD

I

Field number for the color field used to determine color
for symbols posted at the location of points along lines.
Used if CLRMODEI = FIELD.
Default Value = First Color field

Process

93

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

ZCLRIFLD

I

Field number for the z field used to vary the color of the
symbol posted at the location of points along lines. Used
if CLRMODEI = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = First Z Value field

ZTBLMODI

C*16

Method for defining color divisions. Used if CLRMODEI
= Z-FIELD.
Default Value = DIVIDE
Options:

STRTCLRI

° ZCLRIS

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default

NONE

= User specified; divisions taken from
ZCLRIS.

DIVIDE

= Divide the data range into CLRLEVI
divisions. A “nice” starting z value and
increment are calculated.

INCREMENT

= Compute a “nice” starting z
value and increment by
ZINCI.

INCREMENT+START

= Start at ZSTARTI and
increment by ZINCI.

0–255 Starting color index for posting symbols at the location of
points along lines. Used if CLRMODEI = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 56

R

Array of up to 50 maximum z values for color indices to
use when posting symbols at the location of points along
lines. Used if CLRMODEI = Z-FIELD. Required if
ZTBLMODI = NONE.

CLRLEVI

I

1–50

Number of color levels to use to post symbols at the
location of points along lines. Used if CLRMODEI =
Z-FIELD and ZTBLMODI = DIVIDE.
Default Value = 10

ZINCI

R

Increment to use to change color levels. Used if
ZTBLMODI = INCREMENT or INCREMENT+START.
Note: Data Range/ZINCI ≤ 50
Default Value = Data range/CLRLEVI

ZSTARTI

R

Starting value for ZCLRIS. Used if ZTBLMODI =
INCREMENT+START.
Default Value = Minimum data value

Process

94

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for rotating symbols posted at point locations along lines
ROTMODEI C*12

ROTATEI

R

Method for defining the angle of rotation of symbols
posted at the location of points along the line.
Default Value = VALUE
Options:

0.0–
360.0

VALUE

= Each posted symbol is rotated
counterclockwise by ROTATEI degrees
from the y axis.

PARALLEL

= Each posted symbol follows the
orientation of the preceding and
subsequent points along the line.

Angle of rotation for symbols posted at the location of
points along the line. The angle is in degrees and
measured counterclockwise from the y axis. Used if
ROTMODEI = VALUE.
Default Value = 0.0

Parameters for posting labels at point locations along lines
LBCMODIS

LBLCLRIS

R2003.12.0

C*8

I

Array of up to 2 label color modes for posting the fields at
the location of points along lines, corresponding to the
fields in LINEFLDS (page 81).
Default Value = INDEX
Options:
INDEX

= Use color indices given by LBLCLRIS.

SYMBOL

= Use the color of the symbol.

LINE

= Use the color of the line.

0–255 Array of up to 2 color indices for posting the fields at the
location of points along lines, corresponding to the label
color mode in LBCMODIS. Used if LBCMODIS =
INDEX.
Default Value = 8

Process

95

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FONTIS

C*8

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 2 font types for posting the fields at the
location of points along lines, corresponding to the fields
in LINEFLDS.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX

NDECIS

LOCATEI

I

C*8

Array of up to 2 values for the number of decimals to post
for the fields at the location of points along lines,
corresponding to the fields in LINEFLDS.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 2 options for posting the fields at the
location of points along lines, corresponding to the fields
in LINEFLDS. Labels are posted perpendicular to the
lines they reference.
Default Value = LEFT
Options:
LEFT

= Left of the symbol

RIGHT

= Right of the symbol

LBLSZIS

R

Array of up to 2 label sizes for posting the fields at the
location of points along lines in plotter units (in or cm),
corresponding to the fields in LINEFLDS.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

LBLRATEI

I

Label rate for symbols at the location of points along
lines. For example, if LBLRATEI = 5, every 5th location
is labeled.
Default Value = 1

Parameters for ticks and tick labels posted along lines
TICKFLD

R2003.12.0

I

Field number for the z field used to post tick marks and
tick labels along lines. If this is a depth field, a depth scale
is produced. Used if TICKMODE = TICKS or
TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = None

Process

96

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

TICKMODE C*12

TICKS

= Plot tick marks at specified
increment

TICKS+LABELS

= Plot tick marks at specified
increment and label with the value

OMIT

= Do not plot a scale

TICKLEN

R

TICKWGHT

I

ZTICKMIN

R

Minimum value for plotting ticks and labels. Used if
TICKMODE = TICKS or TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = Minimum value of TICKFLD plus
ZTICKINC

ZTICKMAX

R

Maximum value for plotting ticks and labels. Used if
TICKMODE = TICKS or TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = Maximum value of TICKFLD

ZTICKINC

R

Increment between tick marks on scale. Used if
TICKMODE = TICKS or TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = (ZTICKMAX – ZTICKMIN)/10.0

CLRMODTK C*8

R2003.12.0

Method for plotting a scale on lines based on the values of
field TICKFLD. If TICKFLD is a depth field, this is a
depth scale for well traces.
Default Value = OMIT
Options:

Length of the tick in plotter units (in or cm) to plot on the
scale. Used if TICKMODE = TICKS or
TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm
1–8

Multiple of normal line width for plotting ticks on the
scale. Used if TICKMODE = TICKS or
TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = 1

Method for defining the color of the ticks.
Default Value = LINE
Options:
INDEX

= Use color index given by TICKCLR

LINE

= Use color of line

Process

97

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

TICKCLR

I

Range Description and Default
0–255 Color index for drawing ticks. Used if CLRMODTK =
INDEX.
Default Value = 8

LBCMODTK C*8

LBLCLRTK

FONTTK

I

Source of color for labels posted on scales. Used if
TICKMODE = TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = TICK
Options:
INDEX

= Use color index given by LBLCLRTK

TICK

= Use same color as tick mark

LINE

= Use same color as line

0–255 Color index for labels posted on scales. Used if
TICKMODE = TICKS+LABELS and LBCMODTK =
INDEX.
Default Value = 8

C*8

Font type for labels posted on scales. Used if TICKMODE
= TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX

NDECTK

LOCATETK

R2003.12.0

I

Number of decimals for labels posted on scales. Used if
TICKMODE = TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = 0
C*8

Location for labels posted on scales. Labels are posted
perpendicular to the lines they reference Used if
TICKMODE = TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = LEFT
Options:
LEFT

= Left of the line

RIGHT

= Right of the line

Process

98

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LBLSZTK

R

LBLORITK

C*16

Range Description and Default
Label size in plotter units (in or cm) for labels posted on
scales. Used if TICKMODE = TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm
Orientation of the labels relative to the line. Used if
TICKMODE = TICKS+LABELS.
Default Value = PERPENDICULAR
Options:
PERPENDICULAR

= Rotate labels so they are
perpendicular to the direction
of the line.

PARALLEL

= Rotate labels so they are
parallel to the direction of the
line.

Process

99

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Data to ZGF
The data is posted to the graphics file if it has not already been
posted.

R2003.12.0

Process

100

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post DLS
Name

POST DLS

Alternate Name DLS POSTING
Function

This process posts the Dominion Land Survey (DLS). It controls the
types of lines and labels used to draw Township borders, Section
borders, Quarter-section lines, and Legal Subdivision lines, and it
controls the drawing of Township and Section labels, and Road
Allowances.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

TOWNLINE C*8

SECTLINE

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default
Line type of the Township borders.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE

= Do not draw Township lines.

PLAIN

= Draw normal Township lines.

DASHED

= Draw dashed Township lines.

BOLD

= Draw bold Township lines.

Line type of the Section borders.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE

= Do not draw Section lines.

PLAIN

= Draw normal Section lines.

DASHED

= Draw dashed Section lines.

BOLD

= Draw bold Section lines.

Process

101

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

QRTRLINE

C*8

SUBDLINE

C*8

TOWNLABL C*4

SECTLABL

C*4

ROADALLW C*4

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Line type of the Quarter-section borders.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE

= Do not draw Quarter-section lines.

PLAIN

= Draw normal Quarter-section lines.

DASHED

= Draw dashed Quarter-section lines.

BOLD

= Draw bold Quarter-section lines.

Line type for the Legal Subdivisions lines.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE

= Do not draw Legal Subdivision lines.

PLAIN

= Draw normal Legal Subdivision lines.

DASHED

= Draw dashed Legal Subdivision lines.

BOLD

= Draw bold Legal Subdivision lines.

Township labels indicator.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Label the townships.

NO

= Do not label the townships.

Section labels indicator.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Label the sections.

NO

= Do not label the sections.

Road Allowances labels indicator.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Label the road allowances.

NO

= Do not label the road allowances.

Process

102

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

TOWNDASH

R

Length of the dash for Township boundaries, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

TOWNSPCE

R

Length of the space between dashes for Township
boundaries, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

SECTDASH

R

Length of the dash for Section boundaries, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

SECTSPCE

R

Length of the space between dashes for Section
boundaries, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

QRTRDASH

R

Length of the dash for Quarter-section boundaries, in
plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

QRTRSPCE

R

Length of the space between dashes for Quarter-section
boundaries, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

SUBDDASH

R

Length of the dash for Legal Subdivision boundaries, in
plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

SUBDSPCE

R

Length of the space between dashes for Legal Subdivision
boundaries, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

TOWNHGHT

R

Height of Township labels, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

SECTHGHT

R

Height of Section labels, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Process

103

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Grid Nodes
Name

POST GRID NODES

Alternate Name GRID POSTING
Function

This process posts symbols at grid node locations, labels the grid nodes
with their respective grid values, or both.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

SYMBOL

I

Symbol to post at grid nodes. A zero suppresses grid
symbol posting. Otherwise see Appendix C. Symbols,
Fonts, and Line Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus Reference
manual for available symbols.
Default Value = 1, a cross

SYMBSIZE

R

Symbol height, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

SHOWZNON C*4

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Name of the input grid file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0

Symbol posted at ZNON locations indicator.
Default Value = POST
Options:
POST

= Post symbol at ZNON locations.

OMIT

= Do not post symbol at ZNON locations.

RMINWIN

I

Minimum row of the grid to display. This specifies the
bottom of the window.
Default Value = 1

RMAXWIN

I

Maximum row of the grid to display. This specifies the
top of the window.
Default Value = Last row of the grid

CMINWIN

I

Minimum column of the grid to display. This specifies the
left side of the window.
Default Value = 1

Process

104

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CMAXWIN

I

ANNOTATE C*4

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Maximum column of the grid to display. This specifies
the right side of the window.
Default Value = Last column in the grid
Values posted at grid node locations indicator.
Default Value = OMIT
Options:
POST

= Post grid values

OMIT

= Do not post grid values

NDECIMAL

I

Number of digits to right of decimal of posted value. Used
if ANNOTATE = POST.
Default Value = 0

ROWRATE

I

Rate for labeling grid rows; 0 to label none. Used if
ANNOTATE = POST.
Default Value = 1

STARTROW

I

Row (of the window) to start labeling grid nodes. Used if
ANNOTATE = POST.
Note: STARTROW = 1 refers to the window subarray
and not to the row of the original grid. Rows are
counted from the upper left corner, increasing
downward.
Default Value = 1

COLRATE

I

Rate for labeling grid columns. A zero indicates that the
grid columns are not labeled; used if ANNOTATE =
POST.
Default Value = 1

STARTCOL

I

Column (of the window) at which to start labeling grid
nodes. Used if ANNOTATE = POST.
Note: STARTCOL = 1 refers to the first column of the
window subarray and not to the first column of the
original grid. Columns are counted from the upper
left corner, increasing to the right.
Default Value = 1

Process

105

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Lattice
Name

POST LATTICE

Alternate Name LATTICE POSTING
Function

This process posts a RESIN lattice on the current picture.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

• LATTICE

C*24

MFDIN

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the lattice file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the lattice file.
Default Value = 0

Process

106

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Lease
Name

POST LEASE

Alternate Name LEASE POSTING
Function

This process places lease polygon boundaries, lease labels, and lease
annotation on a basemap. It requires two input files, one of which
holds the lease polygons and one of which holds the lease text and
annotation information.
Optionally, leases can be colorfilled with a single color, crosshatched,
or hachured across the entire lease or just around the edges. If there are
shared leases, percentage of ownership can be illustrated with different
colors or fill inside edge shaded polygons. For more detail on the
shared lease attributes, see the section on the LEASE DRAWING
macro in the Macro Reference Manual.
The line color for lease boundaries can be held constant, or it can be
determined by a color field on the input lease polygon file. Lease
annotation text color and text font are selected by the user. The color of
the shade lines, hachure lines, or lease edge border can be fixed or can
be determined by the first color field on the input lease identification
file. Colorfill indices for leases filled with single colors that vary from
lease to lease or with variable multiple color polygons are determined
by color field(s) following the first field on the text identification file.
If lease annotation is selected for each lease based entirely on
information in the lease text information file, only one exception exists
to the expectation that there are separate color fields on the input file to
control polygon colorfill and the color associated with cross-shading
lines, hachures, or edge-shading. The exception is if hachuring or
cross-shading options are chosen along with single color lease colorfill
and only one color field is on the input file. In this case the hachures or
shade lines index is set to 1 (white on the screen, changing to black on
paper). This exception is included so the algorithm is
backwards-compatible with text lease identification files created to run
with earlier versions of this module.

Notes

R2003.12.0

In a ZCL script, the PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a
graphics file and picture before this process is used. For a macro, the
picture should be the currently displayed picture.

Process

107

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• VERTICES

C*24

MFDIN

I

• TEXTIN

C*24

MFDTEXT

I

TEXTOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input vertex file that contains the lease
boundaries.
This file should contain fields of type X, Y, Segment ID
and Area ID. It can optionally contain a color code field.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the vertex file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input text file that contains the lease label
information.
This file should include text fields for posting on the lease
and it must contain an Area ID field. It can optionally
contain an area symbol code that controls the annotation
of individual leases. It can also contain one or more color
fields and multiple z fields to use with matching color
code field if HACHURE = EDGE SHADE FILL is
selected after one or more of the leases to post on the map.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the text file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output text file to contain labels that do not
fit inside the area of the lease. This file is created if a label
does not fit.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output text file.
Default Value = 1

Process

108

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

HACHSRCE C*16

Range Description and Default
Method for guiding the lease hachuring and colorfill.
Note: See HACHURE for the values that should appear
in the field if HACHSRCE = HACHURE FIELD.
Default Value = HACHURE FIELD
Options:
HACHURE FIELD

= Field of type Area Symbol (49) in the
text file used to guide hachuring and
colorfill.
HACHURE VALUE = Use parameter HACHURE to guide
hachuring and colorfill.

COLRSRCE

C*12

Method for determining colorfill index for all lease
annotation options except if HACHURE =
EDGE SHADE NO FILL or EDGE SHADE FILL.
Default Value = COLOR FIELD
Options:
COLOR FIELD

COLOR VALUE

LBLNOFIT

C*20

= Use the color field in the text file to select
the color index. This should be the
second color field if lease hachures or
cross-shading lines are selected on a lease
basis.
= Use COLOR to select the colorfill index
for all leases.

Action to take if labels do not fit lease.
Default Value = REGULAR LABEL
Options:
REGULAR LABEL = Post only the last label in the LABELS
array, centered and extending beyond
lease boundary if it is too large.
REPLACEMENT
= Generate a two letter code (AA, AB, ...
LABEL
BA, BB, ...), place it on the map, place
all labels for that lease in file
TEXTOUT, and place the two letter
code in a new field in that same file.

R2003.12.0

Process

109

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

HACHURE

C*24

Range Description and Default
Type of hachuring and colorfilling.
Note: The corresponding value for the field referenced
by HACHURE FIELD is listed in parentheses.
This value is only used if HACHSRCE =
HACHURE FIELD. See HACHSRCE.
Default Value = NO HACHURE NO FILL
Options:
NO HACHURE NO FILL
= Only lease border and labels (value = 0)
UP HACHURE NO FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, hachure around edge
of lease polygon, no colorfill (value = –1)
DOWN HACHURE NO FILL
= 45 degrees down to right, hachure around
edge of lease polygon, no colorfill (value =
–2)
UP SHADING NO FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, lines across entire
lease, no colorfill (value = –3)
DOWN SHADING NO FILL
= 45 degrees down to right, lines across entire
lease, no colorfill (value = –4)
CROSS SHADING NO FILL
= 45 degree crosshatch lines across entire
lease, no colorfill (value = –5)
UP HACHURE FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, hachure around edge
of lease polygon, with colorfill (value = 1)
DOWN HACHURE FILL
= 45 degrees down to right, hachure around
edge of lease polygon, with colorfill (value
= 2)
UP SHADING FILL
= 45 degrees up to right, lines across entire
lease, with colorfill (value = 3)
DOWN SHADING FILL
= 45 degrees down to right, lines across entire
lease, with colorfill (value = 4)
CROSS SHADING FILL
= 45 degree crosshatch lines, with colorfill
(value = 5)
FILL ONLY
= Only colorfill the lease area (value = 6)
EDGE SHADE NO FILL
= Border edge shading without multiple
colorfill (value = 7)
EDGE SHADE FILL
= Border edge shading with multiple colorfill
for shared lease attributes (value = 8)

R2003.12.0

Process

110

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

COLOR

I

0–255 Color index for the color of colorfill or hachure lines.
Default Value = 1

NUMLABEL

I

0–10

LABELS

I

FONT

C*8

Number of text fields to label.
Default Value = 1
Array of up to 10 numbers of text fields that contain the
information to label on each lease.
Default Value = First field of the correct type
Font for lease labels.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX

LABLSIZE

R

LCLRSRCE

C*12

Array of up to 10 numbers indicating the size of the
posted label, in plotter units (in or cm), in the same
position as the corresponding field being labeled
(LABELS).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm
Source for the polygon line color.
Default Value = COLOR VALUE
Options:
COLOR FIELD = Use the color field on the lease text file
COLOR VALUE = Use the color value LNCOLOR

LNCOLOR

I

0–255 Polygon line color value. Used if LCLRSRC = COLOR
VALUE.
Default Value = 1

LABELCLR

I

0–255 Text color for all lease labels.
Default Value = 1

EDGESRCE

C*12

First source for the edge width color.
Default Value = COLOR FIELD
Options:
COLOR FIELD = Use the color field on the lease text file
COLOR VALUE = Use the color value EDGECLR

R2003.12.0

Process

111

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

EDGECLR

I

EDGEWDTH

R

DIVIDE

Range Description and Default
0–255 Color of the hachure lines or color of the edge shading if
EDGESRCE = COLOR VALUE.
Default Value = 5
Width to use for lease edge shading or width between
lease hachures around the edge of the lease polygon.
Default Value = 0.1

C*8

Axis to use for subdividing polygons to show shared lease
attributes. Used if HACHURE = EDGE SHADE FILL.
Default Value = X-AXIS
Options:
X-AXIS
= Divide along the x axis
Y-AXIS
= Divide along the y axis

HALFEDGE C*4

Indicator for whether to halve the edge width to try to fit
smaller polygons. Used if HACHURE = EDGE SHADE
NO FILL or EDGE SHADE FILL.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO

R2003.12.0

= Attempt to fit shaded edges to smaller
polygons by halving the edge width
= Do not halve the edge width

Process

112

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Lines
Name

POST LINES

Alternate Name DRAW LINES
Function

This process draws lines taken either from a vertex file or from three
data blocks previously set using the DATA BLOCK Process.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

° VERTICES

C*24

Range Description and Default
Name of the input vertex file. If the VERTICES
parameter is not supplied, data is assumed to come from
DATA BLOCKs (see DNUMX, DNUMY,
DNUMSYMB). Required if data is extracted from the
vertex file.

MFDIN

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input vertex file.
Default Value = 0

SYMBOL

I

Symbol that is posted at each vertex point. For examples,
see “Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns” in
the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Default Value = 0, no point is posted

SYMBSIZE

R

Symbol height, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

LINETYPE

C*12

Type of line connecting the points.
Default Value = SOLID
Options:
SOLID

= Normal line to connect points

DASHED

= Dashed line to connect points

BOLD

= Bold line to connect points

SOLID+HACH

= Normal line with hachure to connect
points

BOLD+HACH

= Bold line with hachure to connect
points

Process

113

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Range Description and Default

BOLDWIDE

I

DASHLEN

R

Length of the solid portion of a dashed line, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

GAPLEN

R

CLOSEDIS

R

Length of the gap portion of a dashed line, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm
If the distance between the first and last points of the line
is less than this threshold value, the lines are closed (i.e.,
the last point is connected to the first point). The distance
is measured in engineering units.
Default Value = Diagonal of picture AOI

HACHGAP

R

Distance between successive hachure ticks on hachured
lines, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.5 in or 1.5 cm

HACHLEN

R

Length of the hachure ticks, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.05 in or 0.15 cm

HACHDIR

C*8

UNITS

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*12

2–8

Width of bold line in terms of normal line width.
Default Value = 2

Direction the hachure marks should print.
Default Value = RIGHT
Options:
RIGHT

= Hachures appear on the right relative to
direction along the line.

LEFT

= Hachures appear on left relative to direction
along the line.

Type of coordinate units.
Default Value = USER
Options:
PLOTTER

= Plotter units (in or cm)

USER

= Engineering or user coordinates

Process

114

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

COLOR

I

0–255 Color index from the currently active color table.
Default Value = If lines are being drawn from a file, the
color of the type of lines (vertices or faults)
being drawn
or
13, otherwise

° DNUMX

I

Use number of the input DATA BLOCK that contains the
x coordinates. Required if VERTICES is not specified.

° DNUMY

I

Use number of the input DATA BLOCK that contains the
y coordinates. Required if VERTICES is not specified.

° DNUMSYMB

I

Use number for the input DATA BLOCK that contains
the plot symbol for each of the x,y points.
If DNUMSYMB is zero, then all symbols are set to the
symbol code specified by SYMBOL, and no DATA
BLOCK is required. Required if VERTICES is not
specified.

Process

115

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post NTS
Name

POST NTS

Alternate Name NTS POSTING
Function

This process posts National Topographic Survey (NTS) lines and
labels.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CLIPNTS

C*12

Range Description and Default
Use of DLS with NTS.
Default Value = NTS ONLY
Options:
NTS ONLY

= Plot NTS only

NTS CLIP DLS = Plot NTS clipped to DLS

SURVEY

LINELEVL

R2003.12.0

C*4

C*8

NTS survey type.
Default Value = NTS
Options:
NTS

= Plot true National Topographic Survey

PNGA

= Plot Petroleum & Natural Gas Act

Level or density of lines to draw.
For example, if LINELEVL = SERIES, then NTS, Map
and Series lines are drawn.
Default Value = NTS
Options:
NTS

= NTS line

MAP

= Map line

SERIES

= Series line

BLOCK

= Block line

UNIT

= Unit line

QUARTER

= Quarter line

Process

116

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LABLLEVL

C*8

LWLFLEVL C*8

NTSLINE

R2003.12.0

C*8

Range Description and Default
Level or density of labels to draw. LABLLEVL must be
less than or equal to LINELEVL in density.
Default Value = Density of lines, LINELEVL
Options:
NTS

= NTS number

MAP

= Map letter

SERIES

= Series number

BLOCK

= Block letter

UNIT

= Unit number

QUARTER

= Quarter letter

Level or density of label to draw in the lower left corner
of the map. LWLFLEVL must be less than or equal to
LABLLEVL in density.
Default Value = Density of labels, LABLLEVL
Options:
NONE

= Do not post this label

NTS

= NTS number

MAP

= Map letter

SERIES

= Series number

BLOCK

= Block letter

UNIT

= Unit number

QUARTER

= Quarter letter

Line type for the NTS lines.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN

= Draw normal NTS lines

DASHED

= Draw dashed NTS lines

BOLD

= Draw bold NTS lines

Process

117

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MAPLINE

C*8

SERSLINE

BLCKLINE

UNITLINE

QRTRLINE

R2003.12.0

C*8

C*8

C*8

C*8

Range Description and Default
Line type for the Map lines.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN

= Draw normal Map lines

DASHED

= Draw dashed Map lines

BOLD

= Draw bold Map lines

Line type for the Series lines.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN

= Draw normal Series lines

DASHED

= Draw dashed Series lines

BOLD

= Draw bold Series lines

Line type for the Block lines.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN

= Draw normal Block lines

DASHED

= Draw dashed Block lines

BOLD

= Draw bold Block lines

Line type for the Unit lines.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN

= Draw normal Unit lines

DASHED

= Draw dashed Unit lines

BOLD

= Draw bold Unit lines

Line type for the Quarter lines.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN

= Draw normal Quarter lines

DASHED

= Draw dashed Quarter lines

BOLD

= Draw bold Quarter lines

Process

118

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

NTSLABL

C*4

MAPLABL

SERSLABL

C*4

C*4

BLCKLABL C*4

UNITLABL

C*4

QRTRLABL C*4

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Labeling of NTS lines.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Label NTS lines

NO

= Do not label NTS lines

Labeling of Map lines.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Label Map lines

NO

= Do not label Map lines

Labeling of Series lines.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Label Series lines

NO

= Do not label Series lines

Labeling of Block lines.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Label Block lines

NO

= Do not label Block lines

Labeling of Unit lines.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Label Unit lines

NO

= Do not label Unit lines

Labeling of Quarter lines.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Label Quarter lines

NO

= Do not label Quarter lines

Process

119

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

LWLFLABL C*4

R2003.12.0

Labeling of lower left corner.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES

= Label lower left corner

NO

= Do not label lower left corner

NTSCLR

I

0–255 Color index for NTS lines.
Default Value = Default color from the color table

MAPCLR

I

0–255 Color index for Map lines.
Default Value = Default color from the color table

SERSCLR

I

0–255 Color index for Series lines.
Default Value = Default color from the color table

BLCKCLR

I

0–255 Color index for Block lines.
Default Value = Default color from the color table

UNITCLR

I

0–255 Color index for Unit lines.
Default Value = Default color from the color table

QRTRCLR

I

0–255 Color index for Quarter lines.
Default Value = Default color from the color table

NTSWGHT

I

1–8

Rate for drawing bold NTS lines.
Default Value = 2

MAPWGHT

I

1–8

Rate for drawing bold Map lines.
Default Value = 2

SERSWGHT

I

1–8

Rate for drawing bold Series lines.
Default Value = 2

BLCKWGHT

I

1–8

Rate for drawing bold Block lines.
Default Value = 2

UNITWGHT

I

1–8

Rate for drawing bold Unit lines.
Default Value = 2

QRTRWGHT

I

1–8

Rate for drawing bold Quarter lines.
Default Value = 2

NTSDASH

R

Length of dash for NTS lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if NTSLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Process

120

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

MAPDASH

R

Length of dash for Map lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if MAPLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

SERSDASH

R

Length of dash for Series lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if SERSLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

BLCKDASH

R

Length of dash for Block lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if BLCKLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

UNITDASH

R

Length of dash for Unit lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if UNITLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

QRTRDASH

R

Length of dash for Quarter lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if QRTRLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

NTSGAP

R

Length of gap for NTS lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if NTSLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

MAPGAP

R

Length of gap for Map lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if MAPLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

SERSGAP

R

Length of gap for Series lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if SERSLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

BLCKGAP

R

Length of gap for Block lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if BLCKLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

UNITGAP

R

Length of gap for Unit lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if UNITLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

QRTRGAP

R

Length of gap for Quarter lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used if QRTRLINE = DASHED.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

Process

121

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

NTSFONT

C*8

Range Description and Default
Type font for NTS line labels.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX

R2003.12.0

MAPFONT

C*8

Type font for Map line labels.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
Same as NTSFONT

SERSFONT

C*8

Type font for Series line labels.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
Same as NTSFONT

BLCKFONT C*8

Type font for Block line labels.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
Same as NTSFONT

UNITFONT

Type font for Unit line labels.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
Same as NTSFONT

C*8

QRTRFONT C*8

Type font for Quarter line labels.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
Same as NTSFONT

LWLFONT

Type font for the lower left corner label.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
Same as NTSFONT

C*8

Process

122

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

NTSHGHT

R

Label height for NTS line labels in plotter units. Used if
NTSLABL = YES.
Default Value = Based on map scale and the size of each
grid element

MAPHGHT

R

Label height for Map line labels in plotter units. Used if
MAPLABL = YES.
Default Value = Based on map scale and the size of each
grid element

SERSHGHT

R

Label height for Series line labels in plotter units. Used if
SERSLABL = YES.
Default Value = Based on map scale and the size of each
grid element

BLCKHGHT

R

Label height for Block line labels in plotter units. Used if
BLCKLABL = YES.
Default Value = Based on map scale and the size of each
grid element

UNITHGHT

R

Label height for Unit line labels in plotter units. Used if
UNITLABL = YES.
Default Value = Based on map scale and the size of each
grid element

QRTRHGHT

R

Label height for Quarter line labels in plotter units. Used
if QRTRLABL = YES.
Default Value = Based on map scale and the size of each
grid element

LWLFHGHT

R

Label height for lower left corner label in plotter units.
Used if LWLFLABL = YES.
Default Value = Based on map scale and the size of each
grid element

Process

123

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Seismic
Name

POST SEISMIC

Alternate Name SEISMIC POSTING
Function

This process posts seismic lines.

Notes

ZVALLOC and LABLLOC should have the same value, meaning that
both angles should be measured with respect to the same line.
The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• DATAIN

C*24

Name of the posting file.

MFDIN

I

INFLD

I

POSTMODE C*20

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Field number of the desired field in the data file.
Default Value = First Z Value field
Method for determining how shotpoints are posted.
Default Value = ENDPOINTS+POSTRATE
Options:
ALL POINTS

= All points

INTERVALS

= Compute posting interval such that
successive posted points are at least
POSTDIST apart

TRACKLINE

= Trackline (a line that connects
shotpoints) only, post no symbols

ENDPOINTS+POSTRATE
= Endpoints plus every POSTRATEth
point on the file, beginning with the
point number POSTADD
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE
= Endpoints plus every point for which
the shotpoint number plus POSTADD
is evenly divisible by POSTRATE

R2003.12.0

Process

124

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SYMBOL

I

Symbol code. See Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus Reference manual for
available symbols.
Default Value = 14, a circle

SYMBSIZE

R

Symbol height, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.07 in or 0.20 cm

POSTRATE

I

Point-posting frequency; every POSTERATEth point is
posted.
Default Value = 2

POSTADD

I

After the starting endpoint, begin with the POSTADDth
point from the starting point.
Default Value = 1

POSTDIST

R

Minimum distance between posted points, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm

LABLMODE C*20

Range Description and Default

Shotpoint label selection mode.
Default Value = ENDPOINTS+LABLRATE
Options:
NO LABELS

= No labels are posted

ALL POINTS

= All points

INTERVALS

= Compute posting interval such that
successive labeled points are separated
by at least LABLDIST

ENDPOINTS+LABLRATE
= Both endpoints plus every
LABLRATEth point on the file, starting
with point LABLADD
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE
= Both endpoints plus every point for
which the shotpoint number plus
LABLADD becomes evenly divisible
by LABLRATE

R2003.12.0

Process

125

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LABLLOC

C*20

LABLRATE

I

LABLADD

I

LABLDIST

R

Range Description and Default
Location of labels.
Default Value = LEFT+ABOVE+LINE
Options:
LEFT+ABOVE+X-AXIS

= Left of the line (above for a
horizontal line) where
ANGLE is with respect to x
axis

RIGHT+BELOW+X-AXI
S

= Right of the line (below for
a horizontal line) where
ANGLE is with respect to x
axis

RIGHT+BELOW+LINE

= Right of the line (below for
a horizontal line) where
ANGLE is with respect to
line

LEFT+ABOVE+LINE

= Left of the line (above for a
horizontal line) where
ANGLE is with respect to
line

Shotpoint labeling frequency; every LABLRATEth
posted point is labeled.
Default Value = 2
After the starting endpoint, begin labeling shotpoints with
the LABLADDth point from the starting point.
Default Value = 0
Distance between posted labels, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm

Process

126

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

ZVALMODE C*20

Range Description and Default
Selection method for z value labels.
Default Value = NO LABELS
Options:
ALL POINTS

= All z values labeled

NO LABELS

= No z value labels

SHOTPOINT

= Post z value labels if shotpoint labels are
posted

ENDPOINTS+POSTRATE
The endpoints plus every ZVALRATEth z
value are labeled, beginning with points
ZVALADD
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE
= Endpoints plus every point for which the
shotpoint number plus ZVALADD is
evenly divisible by ZVALRATE

ZVALLOC

R2003.12.0

C*20

The z value posting position.
Default Value = RIGHT+BELOW+LINE
Options:
LEFT+ABOVE+X-AXIS

= Left of the line (above for a
horizontal line) where
ANGLE is with respect to x
axis

RIGHT+BELOW+X-AXI
S

= Right of the line (below for
a horizontal line) where
ANGLE is with respect to x
axis

RIGHT+BELOW+LINE

= Right of the line (below for
a horizontal line) where
ANGLE is with respect to
line

LEFT+ABOVE+LINE

= Left of the line (above for a
horizontal line) where
ANGLE is with respect to
line

Process

127

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

ZVALRATE

I

The z value posting frequency. ZVALRATE must be
greater than zero if ZVALMODE =
ENDPOINTS+POSTRATE or
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE.
Default Value = 0

ZVALADD

I

LABLSIZE

R

After the starting endpoint, begin posting the z value with
the ZVALADDth point from the starting point.
Default Value = 0
Height of shotpoint and z value labels, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

ANGLE

R

0.0–
180.0
degrees

Angle of shotpoint and z value annotation, in degrees.
Default Value = 90.0 degrees

NDECIMAL

I

Number of digits to right of decimal of posted value.
Default Value = 0

ZBIAS

R

Bias the z value by ZBIAS before posting.
Default Value = 0.0

ZSCALE

R

Multiply the z value by ZSCALE before posting.
Default Value = 1.0

NAMELOC

C*12

Location for posting the seismic line name.
Default Value = BOTH+LINE
Options:
BOTH+LINE

= Both endpoints and NAMEANGL is
with respect to line

START+LINE

= Starting endpoint only and
NAMEANGL is with respect to line

END+LINE

= ENding endpoint only and
NAMEANGL is with respect to line

BOTH+X-AXI
S

= Both endpoints and NAMEANGL is
with respect to x axis

START+X-AXI = Starting endpoint only and
S
NAMEANGL is with respect to x axis
END+X-AXIS

R2003.12.0

= Ending endpoint only and
NAMEANGL is with respect to x axis

Process

128

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

NAMESIZE

R

NAMEANGL

R

LINETYPE

Height of line name, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm
0.0–
Angle of line name, in degrees.
180.0 Default Value = 0.0 degrees
degrees

C*8

Type of trackline, i.e., the type of line connecting
consecutive points in the same seismic line.
Default Value = SOLID
Options:
NONE

= No trackline

SOLID

= Normal trackline

DASHED

= Dashed trackline

BOLD

= Bold trackline

DASHLEN

R

Dash length along trackline, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.2 in or 0.5 cm

ZNON

R

Null data value for the field being posted.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

NEWOLD

° POSTIN

POSTOUT

MFDPST

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

C*4

Whether the posted line list file is new or old.
Default Value = NEW
Options:
NEW

= File is new and is given by POSTOUT

OLD

= File is old and is given by POSTIN

C*24

Name of input posted line list file.
The file must be of type LPST. This file has a list of all
lines on the input data file, their location and a flag for if
they have been posted or not. Required if NEWOLD =
OLD.

C*24

Name of the output posted line list file. This file is created
if NEWOLD = NEW.
Default Value = LINE LOCATION FILE

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the posted line list file
for input or output depending on the value of NEWOLD.
Default Value = 0

Process

129

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

° LINEIN
MFDLIN

SELECT

FONT

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24
I

C*8

C*8

Name of the file that contains the list of line names to
post. Required if SELECT = ONLY.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the list of line names
file.
Default Value = 0
Method for selecting which lines to post.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= Post all lines. If NEWOLD = OLD, post
all lines not previously posted.

ONLY

= Post only those lines included by the list
in LINEIN. If NEWOLD = OLD, post
only selected lines that have not been
posted.

EXCEPT

= Post only the lines excluded by the list in
LINEIN.

Type font to use. See Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and
Line Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus Reference manual for
examples of font types.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX

R2003.12.0

SYMFLD

I

Field number for symbol code field to use for symbol to
post. Used if PSTSYM = SYMBOL FIELD.
Default Value = First Symbol Code field

CLRFLD

I

Field number for color field to use for color of symbol.
Used if CLRMODE = COLOR FIELD.
Default Value = First Color field

° ZCLRFLD

I

Field number for z field to use for determining color.
Required if CLRMODE = Z-FIELD.

Process

130

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SYMCLR

I

° ZCLRINC

R

° CLRLEV

I

1–50

STRTCOLR

I

0–255 Color index for first color to use if CLRMODE =
Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 56

CLRMODE

C*12

PSTSYM

R2003.12.0

C*16

Range Description and Default
0–255 Color index for symbol color table. Used if CLRMODE =
SYMBOL COLOR.
Default Value = 20
Options:
0 = value in color table
1–255 = color index to use
Increment for color change based on z field. Required if
CLRMODE = Z-FIELD and CLRTABLE =
INCREMENT.
Number of color levels to use when varying color based
on z field. Required if CLRMODE= Z-FIELD and
CLRTABLE = TYPE IN or DIVISIONS.

Method for determining how the color for the symbols is
obtained.
Default Value = SYMBOL COLOR
Options:
SYMBOL
COLOR

= All symbols are the color given by
parameter SYMCLR

COLOR FIELD

= Color of each symbol is given by the
value of the field specified by
CLRFLD

Z-FIELD

= Color of each symbol is determined
by the value of the field specified by
ZCLRFLD

Method for determining how the symbols to post at each
point’s location are obtained.
Default Value = SYMBOL NUMBER
Options:
SYMBOL
NUMBER

= Use symbol number given by
SYMBOL

SYMBOL FIELD

= Use symbol code field given by
SYMFLD

OMIT

= Do not post a symbol

Process

131

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CLRTABLE

C*12

Range Description and Default
Method for determining how the Z Range color table is
defaulted. Needed if CLRMODE = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = DIVISIONS
Options:
TYPE IN

= Do not default the table values.

DIVISIONS

= Divide the z field range into
CLRLEV equal divisions. Table
starts with minimum z value.

INCREMENT

= Start the table with the nearest
multiple of ZCLRINC that is less
than the minimum z value. Each
level is incremented by ZCLRINC
until maximum z value is exceeded
or the length of the table is reached.

ZCLRS

R

Array of up to 50 z values for color indices to use when
posting symbols. Used if CLRMODE = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = If the z value is less than ZCLRS color,
STRTCOLR is used
or
If the z value is greater than ZCLRS and less
than ZCLRS2, then STRTCOLR + 1 is used
and so forth until the end of the table is reached

LBLCLR

I

0–255 Color index for labels.
Default Value = 20
Options:
0, value in color table
Otherwise, color index to use

LINEWGHT

I

1–8

CREATPST

C*16

Bold line width factor as a multiple of plain line widths.
Default Value = 2
Whether to create and post the output posted line list file
POSTOUT or to create POSTOUT without posting the
seismic lines.
Default Value = POST
Options:
POST

= Create POSTOUT and post seismic lines.

CREATE NO POST
= Create POSTOUT but do not post seismic
lines. Valid only if NEWOLD = NEW

R2003.12.0

Process

132

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Seismic New
Name

POST SEISMIC NEW

Alternate Name SEISMIC POST NEW
Function

Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN

This new seismic posting process offers additional capabilities for
posting seismic line data beyond those in the POST SEISMIC Process.
This process posts both 2D and 3D seismic survey data, allowing line,
shotpoint, symbol and label decimation, as well as control over the
size, color and font of shotpoint symbols and all labels. This process
also provides methods of indicating discontinuities (unconformities)
along seismic lines.
Data
Type
C*24
I

POSTMODE C*4

Name of the input seismic file (2D or 3D).
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Mode for posting lines/surveys.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= All data is posted

SOME

= Only lines/surveys that pass the selection
criterion (see parameter SLCTOPER) are
posted

WLDMULTI C*1

Wildcard character that matches zero or more characters.
Used to specify masks for text fields for line identification
(parameters SLTXTAS & SLTXTBS).
Default Value = * (asterisk)

WLDSINGL

Wildcard character that matches exactly one character.
Used to specify masks for text fields for line identification
(parameters SLTXTAS & SLTXTBS).
Default Value = % (percent)

SLCTFLD

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

C*1

I

Number of the field in the input file to use for selection
purposes. If the input file is 2D seismic, then the select
field can be type Line Name or Seismic Line Number. If
the input file is 3D seismic, then the select field must be
type 3D Survey Name. Used only if POSTMODE =
SOME.
Default Value = Primary sort field index

Process

133

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DISCFLD

I

DISCONTS

Range Description and Default
Field number of the Discontinuity Code field in the input
file. Used only if DISCONTS = YES.
Default Value = First field of correct type on the input file

C*4

DISCSIZE

R

DISCPATT

I

Use of discontinuity fields.
Default Value = NO
Options:
NO

= Ignore discontinuity fields

YES

= Use the discontinuity field specified by
DISCFLD

Scale value of the posted shotpoint symbol size if the
shotpoint falls in a discontinuity. Used only if
DISCONTS = YES.
Default Value = 1.0
–1

Track line pattern for segments of a seismic line that fall

through in a discontinuity. Used only if DISCONTS = YES.

20

Default Value = 1
Options:
–1
0

= Same pattern as track line
= No track line

<0 = Use the line pattern specified (see Appendix C.
Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns in the Z-MAP
Plus Reference manual for examples)

ZRNGMODE C*12

Mode for creation of Z Range table. This table is used
only if SYMSZMOD or COLORMOD = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = TYPE IN
Options:
TYPE IN

= Up to 50 values are supplied by
ZRNGTABL

DIVIDE

= Divide the modulation range into number
of levels specified by NUMZRNGS

INC

= Each level of the table – starting with the
data file minimum value – is increased by
ZRNGINCM

INC+START

R2003.12.0

= Each level of the table – starting with
value of ZRNGSTRT – is increased
by ZRNGINCM

Process

134

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

ZRNGTABL

R

Array of up to 50 z range values for building the Z Range
table used for modulating colors and sizes. Used only if
ZRNGMODE = TYPE IN and either COLORMOD or
SYMSZMOD = Z-FIELD.

ZRNGINCM

R

Increment by which each level of the Z Range table is
increased.Used if ZRNGMODE = INC or INC+START.
Default Value = 1.0

ZRNGSTRT

R

NUMZRNGS

I

Value at which to start incrementing the z values in the
Z Range table. Used if ZRNGMODE = INC+START.
Default Value = Minimum z data value
Number of Z Range levels to create in or use from
ZRNGTABL or SIZETABL.
If ZRNGMODE or SIZETMOD = TYPE IN, then this
value is the number of entries in ZRNGTABL or
SIZETABL. Otherwise it is the desired length of the
table.
If the tables are computed, then the resulting size of the
tables overrides the size specified by NUMZRNGS.
Used if varying color or size based on a z field, i.e.,
SIZETMOD or COLORMOD = Z-FIELD, and if the
modulating field MODULFLD is used.
Default Value = 50

MODULFLD

I

Field number of the modulation field in the input file.
Field can be any numeric field. Used if varying color or
size based on a z field, i.e., SIZETMOD or COLORMOD
= Z-FIELD.

COLORFLD

I

Field number of a color field in the input file to use for
track lines, shotpoint symbols, shotpoint labels, and
attribute labels. Must be field type Color. Used if
COLORMOD = FIELD.

1–50

Process

135

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

COLORMOD C*8

COLORSTR

I

SIZETMOD

C*12

Range Description and Default
Color mode for defining color of track lines, shotpoint
symbols, shotpoint labels, and attribute labels.
Default Value = VALUE
Options:
VALUE

= Color value specific to the matched
selection criterion (see SYMCLR &
LBLCLR)

FIELD

= Color field specified by COLORFLD

Z-FIELD

= A z field specified by MODULFLD is used
to look up the color of the symbol in the Z
Range color table

Starting color index for modulated colors. Used to build a
Z Range color table to vary color by z field if
COLORMOD = Z-FIELD.
Default Value = 1
Mode used for creating a Z Range size table. The size
table is set up if any posted items rely on a modulated
size.
Default Value = TYPE IN
Options:
TYPE IN

= Up to 50 values are supplied by SIZETABL

DIVIDE

= Divide the modulation range into number of
levels specified by NUMZRNGS

INC

= Each level of the table – starting with
SIZETMIN – is increased by SIZETINC

INC+START

R2003.12.0

= Each level of the table – starting with
SIZETSTR – is increased by SIZETINC

SIZETABL

R

Array of up to 50 size values used when modulating sizes,
in the same position as the corresponding z range in
ZRNGTABL. Used only if SIZETMOD = TYPE IN or
SYMSZMOD = Z-FIELD.

SIZETINC

R

Size table increment. Used to construct the size table only
if SIZETMOD = DIVIDE, INC, or INC+START.
Default Value = (SIZETMAX – SIZETMIN) /
NUMZRNGS

Process

136

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MNSIZTBV

R

Size assigned if the z value falls below the minimum
Z Range table value. Used only if SYMSZMOD =
Z-FIELD.
Note: In effect, this value always becomes the first entry
in the size table.
Default Value = 0.1

SIZETSTR

R

Start value of the Z Range size table. Used only if
SIZETMOD = INC+START.
Default Value = 0.1

SIZETMIN

R

Minimum value of the range of sizes to calculate for
constructing the Z Range size table. Used only if
SIZETMOD = DIVIDE or INC.
Default Value = 0.1

SIZETMAX

R

Maximum value of the range of sizes to calculate for
constituting the Z Range size table. Used only if
SIZETMOD = DIVIDE, INC, or INC+START.
Default Value = 0.1

POSTDIST

R

Minimum allowable plotter distance between data points,
in plotter units. Value of zero disables usage.
This parameter prevents label overposting. If enabled, this
parameter is in effect at all times, even if all points are
posted.

C*4

Repositioning of line names when the line endpoints are
clipped to the edge of the area of interest (AOI), and of
3D survey names when the computed position of the label
falls partially or totally outside the AOI.
Default Value = NO
Options:

INSIDE

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

NO

= Do not attempt to reposition.

YES

= Line names: Post the line name immediately
outside the border.
= 3D survey names: First any add-on label
specified by 3DANGLE is removed. Secondly,
an attempt is made to move the label back inside
the border AOI.

3DSIZFLD

I

Field number of a Text Size field in the input file to use
for 3D survey names. Must be field type Text Size.

3DCLRFLD

I

Field number of a Color field in the input file to use for
the 3D survey names. Must be field type Color.

Process

137

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

3DFNTFLD

I

3DLOCATE

C*12

3DFONT

C*8

Range Description and Default
Field number of a Text Font field to use for 3D survey
names. Must be field type Text Font.
Location of posted 3D survey names.
Default Value = BOTH+LINE
Options:
BOTH+LINE

= Combines START+LINE and
END+LINE as described below

START+LINE

= Parallel and above the first line in the
survey

END+LINE

= Parallel and below the last line in the
survey

BOTH+SHOT

= Combines START+SHOT and
END+SHOT as described below

START+SHOT

= Post at the beginning of the seismic
lines perpendicular to the line

END+SHOT

= Post at the end of the seismic lines
perpendicular to the lines

CENTER

= Post in the center of the survey

OMIT

= Do not post 3D survey names

Font for posting 3D survey name. Used only if
3DFNTFLD is zero.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX

R2003.12.0

Process

138

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

3DTKMODE C*8

3DLNMODE C*8

LNLOCATE C*8

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
3D track line posting mode.
Default Value = RATE
Options:
RATE

= Post the first, last, and each 3DTKRATEth
track line starting with 3DTKSTRT

ALL

= Post all track lines in the 3D seismic survey

DIVIDE

= Post the first, last, and each track number
which plus a bias (ATTBIAS) is evenly
divisible by 3DTKRATE

NONE

= Post no 3D track lines

3D line name posting mode.
Default Value = RATE
Options:
RATE

= Post the first, last, and each 3DLNRATEth
3D line name starting with 3DLNSTRT

ALL

= Post all line names in the 3D seismic survey

DIVIDE

= Post the first, last, and each 3D line number
evenly divisible by 3DLNSTRT value

NONE

= Post no 3D line names

Line name location mode.
Default Value = BOTH
Options:
BOTH

= Post the line name at both ends of the line

START

= Post the line name at the beginning of the
line

END

= Post the line name at the end of the line

NORTH

= Post the line name at the north side of the
line

SOUTH

= Post the line name at the south side of the
line

EAST

= Post the line name at the east side of the line

WEST

= Post the line name at the west side of the
line

OMIT

= Do not post line names

Process

139

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

LNORIENT

C*8

Line name orientation.
Default Value = LINE
Options:
LINE

= Line name label parallel to the track line

X-AXIS

= Line name label parallel to the x axis

LNSIZFLD

I

Field number of a text size field in the input file to use for
line names. Must be field type Text Size.

LNCLRFLD

I

Field number of a color field in the input file to use for
line names. Must be field type Color.

LNFNTFLD

I

Field number of a font field in the input file to use for line
names. Must be field type Text Font.

LNFONT

C*8

TKCONNCT C*8

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

Font type for posted line name. Used only if LNFNTFLD
is zero.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN

= Z-MAP Plus plain

SIMPLEX

= Roman simplex

COMPLEX

= Roman complex

ITALIC

= Italics

DUPLEX

= Duplex

Which points in a seismic line to use when posting the
track line.
Default Value = POSTED
Options:
POSTED

= Track line drawn using only the points
posted with shotpoint symbols

ALL

= Track line drawn using all the points in the
dataset for that seismic line

Process

140

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

TKPATFLD

I

Range Description and Default
Field number of a line pattern number field in the input
file to use for track lines. Must be field type Line Pattern
Number.
Options:
0
<0

= Use line pattern specified by TKPATFLD field

TKWGTFLD

I

Field number of a line weight field in the input file to use
for track lines. Must be field type Line Weight.

RESHTFLD

I

Field number of a shotpoint reshot field in the input file.
Must be field type Reshot Character.
Default Value = First field of correct type

SYMSZFLD

I

Field number of a symbol size field in the input file to use
for size of posted shotpoint symbols. Used if
SYMSZMOD = FIELD. Must be field type Symbol Size.
Default Value = First field of correct type

SYMCDFLD

I

Field number of a symbol code field in the input file to
use for posting shotpoint symbols. Must be field type
Symbol Code.
Default Value = 0
Options:

SYMSZMOD C*8

R2003.12.0

= Use line pattern defined by TKPATTRN
(page 146)

0

= Use values defined by SYMBOL (page 146)

<0

= Use symbol specified by SYMCDFLD field

Shotpoint symbol size mode.
Default Value = VALUE
Options:
VALUE

= A size value specific to the matched selection
criteria is used

FIELD

= Get the size of the symbol from a field (see
SYMSZFLD)

Z-FIELD

= A field in the data specified by SYMSZFLD
is used to look up the size of the symbol from
a table (see MODULFLD)

Process

141

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SYMPSTMD C*8

SYMLABMD C*8

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Shotpoint symbol posting mode.
Note: If DISCONTS = YES, then each shotpoint at a
discontinuity is also posted.
Default Value = RATE
Options:
RATE

= Post the shotpoints at the endpoints of the
line, and each POSTRATEth shotpoint
starting with the POSTADDth shotpoint

ALL

= Post all shotpoints

DIVIDE

= Post the shotpoint numbers at the
endpoints of the seismic line, and each
shotpoint number where shotpoint
number plus POSTADD is evenly
divisible by POSTRATE

INTERVAL

= Post each shotpoint that is at least
POSTRATE distance from the previous
shotpoint

NONE

= Post no shotpoint symbols

Shotpoint label posting mode.
Default Value = RATE
Options:
RATE

= Post the shotpoints numbers at the
endpoints of the line, and each
LABLRATEth shotpoint number starting
with the LABLADDth shotpoint number

ALL

= Post a shotpoint number at each posted
shotpoint symbol

DIVIDE

= Post the shotpoint numbers at the
endpoints of the seismic line and each
shotpoint number where shotpoint number
plus LABLADD is evenly divisible by
LABLRATE

INTERVAL

= Post each shotpoint label that is at least
LABLRATE distance from the previous
shotpoint label

NONE

= Post no shotpoint labels

Process

142

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

ATTBFLD

I

Field number of an attribute field in the input file to post
labels for. May be any numeric field. In order for
attributes to be posted, this value must be defined and
ATTBMODE must not equal NONE.

ATTNDECM

I

Number of decimal places to the right of the decimal
point in the posted attribute label.
Default Value = 0

ATTBIAS

I

Value to add to the attribute value prior to posting.
Default Value = 0.0

ATTSCALE

I

Value for multiplying the attribute value prior to posting.
Default Value = 1.0
Attribute posting mode.
Note: If DISCONTS = YES, then each shotpoint at a
discontinuity is also posted.
Default Value = RATE
Options:

ATTBMODE C*8

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

NONE

= No attribute labels are posted

RATE

= Post the attribute labels at the endpoints
of the line, and each ATTBRATEth
attribute label starting with the
ATTBADDth attribute label

ALL

= Post an attribute label at each posted
shotpoint symbol

DIVIDE

= Post the attribute labels at the endpoints of
the seismic line, and each attribute label
where shotpoint number plus ATTBADD
is evenly divisible by ATTBRATE

INTERVAL

= Post each attribute label that is at least
ATTBRATE distance from the previous
attribute label

Process

143

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SLCTOPER

C*8

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 20 comparison operations. Used only if
POSTMODE = SOME.
Default Value = EQ
Options:
EQ

= Post the lines/surveys equal to SLTXTAS or
SLVALAS

NE

= Post the lines/surveys not equal to SLTXTA or
SLVALAS

LT

= Post the lines/surveys less than SLTXTAS or
SLVALAS

LE

= Post the lines/surveys less than or equal to
SLTXTAS or SLVALAS

GT

= Post the lines/surveys greater than SLTXTAS
or SLVALAS

GE

= Post the lines/surveys greater than or equal to
SLTXTAS or SLVALAS

NULL

= Post the lines/surveys equal to the null value of
the selected field

NOTNULL

= Post the lines/surveys not equal to the null
value of the selected field

BETWEEN

= Post the lines/surveys between the interval
bounded by SLTXTAS and SLTXTBS or
SLVALAS and SLVALBS

OUTSIDE

= Post the lines/surveys between the interval
bounded by SLTXTAS and SLTXTBS or
SLVALAS and SLVALBS

SLTXTAS

C*80

Array of up to 20 primary text masks for line
identification.

SLTXTBS

C*80

Array of up to 20 secondary text masks for line
identification.

SLVALAS

R

Array of up to 20 primary numeric masks for line
identification.

SLVALBS

R

Array of up to 20 secondary numeric masks for line
identification.

SYMCLR

I

0–255 Array of up to 20 color indices used for track lines and
shotpoint symbols.
Default Value = 20

Process

144

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

LBLCLR

I

0–255 Array of up to 20 color indices used for shotpoint and
attribute labels.
Default Value = 20

3DNMSIZE

R

3DNMCLR

I

3DANGLE

R

Array of up to 20 counterclockwise angles in degrees to
add to the 3D survey name label to post.
Default Value = 0.0

3DTKRATE

I

Array of up to 20 integers used to define the 3D track line
rate. Used if 3DTKMODE = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 2

3DTKSTRT

I

Array of up to 20 integers used to define the 3D track line
starting point. Used if 3DTKMODE = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 0

3DLNRATE

I

Array of up to 20 integers used to define the 3D line name
rate. Used if 3DLNMODE = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 2

3DLNSTRT

I

Array of up to 20 integers used to define the 3D line name
starting point. Used if 3DLNMODE = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 0

NAMESIZE

R

Array of up to 20 size labels used to define the size of the
line name label to post. Used only if LNSIZFLD = 0.
Default Value = 0.1

LNCOLOR

I

LNANGLE

R

Array of up to 20 label sizes for the 3D survey names to
post. Used only if 3DSIZFLD = 0.
Default Value = 0.1
0–255 Array of up to 20 color indices of the 3D survey name
label to post. Used only if LNCLRFLD = 0.
Default Value = 20

0–255 Array of up to 20 color indices to use for the line name
label. Used only if LNCLRFLD = 0.
Default Value = 20
Options:
0 = Value in color table
1-255 = Color index number to use
Array of up to 20 counterclockwise angles in degrees to
add to the line name label before posting.
Default Value = 0.0

Process

145

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
TKPATTRN

Data
Type
I

Range Description and Default
0–20

Array of up to 20 pattern values assigned to posted track
lines. Used only if TKPATFLD = 0.
Default Value = 1
Options:
0
1–20

R2003.12.0

= No track line
= Use pattern specified. (For examples, see
“Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns” in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.)

TKWEIGHT

I

Array of up to 20 weight values assigned to posted track
lines. Used only if TKWGTFLD = 0.
Default Value = 2

NUMBRBRK

I

Array of up to 20 numbers to compare against the
difference between two consecutive shotpoint numbers. If
the difference is greater than NUMBRBRK, then the track
line is broken. A value of zero disables usage.
Default Value = 0

DISTBRK

R

Array of up to 20 numbers to compare against the
distance between two consecutive shotpoint numbers. If
DISTBRK is greater than this distance, then the track line
is broken. A value of zero disables usage.
Default Value = 0.0

SYMBSIZE

R

Array of up to 20 shotpoint symbol sizes to post. Used
only if SYMSZMOD = VALUE.
Default Value = 0.07

SYMBOL

I

Array of up to 20 symbol codes to post. Used only if
SYMCDFLD = 0.
Default Value = 14

POSTRATE

I

Array of up to 20 shotpoint symbol posting rates. Used
only if SYMPSTMD = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 2

POSTADD

I

Array of up to 20 shotpoint symbol posting starting
points. Used only if SYMPSTMD = DIVIDE or RATE.
Default Value = 1

LABLSIZE

R

Array of up to 20 shotpoint label sizes to post.
Default Value = 0.1

Process

146

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

LABLANGL

R

Array of up to 20 counterclockwise angles in degrees to
add to the shotpoint label to post.
Default Value = 0.0

LABLRATE

I

Array of up to 20 shotpoint label rates. Used only if
SYMLABMD = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 2

LABLADD

I

Array of up to 20 shotpoint label starting points. Used
only if SYMLABMD = DIVIDE.
Default Value = 0

ATTBSIZE

R

Array of up to 20 attribute label sizes to post.
Default Value = 0.1

ATTANGLE

R

Array of up to 20 counterclockwise angles in degrees to
add to the attribute label before posting.
Default Value = 0.0

ATTBRATE

I

Array of up to 20 attribute labeling rates. Used only if
ATTBMODE = RATE or DIVIDE.
Default Value = 2

ATTBADD

I

Array of up to 20 attribute label starting points. Used only
if ATTBMODE = DIVIDE.
Default Value = 0

Process

147

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Star Symbol
Name

POST STAR SYMBOL

Alternate Name STAR SYMBOL POST
Function

This process posts star symbols, where the length of each spoke of the
star depends on a field value.

Example

Spoke size calculation for first field where NUMCLASS(1) = 4
(numbers in parentheses are the array element positions):
Field Value

Length of Spoke

< MINVALS(1)

No spoke is drawn

≥ MINVALS(1) and < CLSLMT1S(1)

LENMINS(1)

≥ CLSLMT1S(1) and < CLSLMT1S(2)

LENMINS(1) + LENINC

≥ CLSLMT1S(2) and < CLSLMT1S(3)

LENMINS(1) + 2*LENINC

≥ CLSLMT1S(3)

LENMINS(1) + 3*LENINC

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

Range Description and Default

C*24

Name of the input file. File must have x and y fields.

MFDIN

I

XFLD

I

Field number of x field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

SYMBSIZE

R

Height of the symbol without any spokes, in plotter units
(in or cm). The symbol is a circle.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

LENINC

R

Size for incrementing the length of the spokes, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.06 in or 0.15 cm

NUMSPOKE

I

• POSTFLDS

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

0–5

1–8

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

Number of spokes for the star.
Default Value = 1
Array of up to 8 numbers of fields to post, one for each
spoke.
Default Value = None

Process

148

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

ZNONS

R

Array of up to 8 null values, in same position as
corresponding field to post in POSTFLDS.
Default Value = Null value for field

NUMCLASS

I

LENMINS

R

Array of up to 8 minimum spoke lengths, in plotter units
(in or cm), one for each spoke.
Default Value = 0.06 in or 0.15 cm

MINVALS

R

Array of up to 8 minimum values to post, in the same
position as the corresponding field listed in POSTFLDS.
If a field value is less than this value a spoke is not drawn
for the field.
Default Value = Minimum value for the field

CLSLMT1S

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
for the first spoke, one for each class.
Default Value = Calculated so that the data range is
divided into NUMCLASS intervals, where the
interval is a “nice” number

CLSLMT2S

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
for the second spoke, one for each class.
Default Value = Calculated so that the data range is
divided into NUMCLASS intervals, where the
interval is a “nice” number

CLSLMT3S

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
for the third spoke, one for each class.
Default Value = Calculated so that the data range is
divided into NUMCLASS intervals, where the
interval is a “nice” number

CLSLMT4S

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
for the fourth spoke, one for each class.
Default Value = Calculated so that the data range is
divided into NUMCLASS intervals, where the
interval is a “nice” number

CLSLMT5S

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
for the fifth spoke, one for each class.
Default Value = Calculated so that the data range is
divided into NUMCLASS intervals, where the
interval is a “nice” number

1–6

Array of up to 8 entries of class divisions, one for each
spoke.
Default Value = 2

Process

149

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

CLSLMT6S

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
for the sixth spoke, one for each class.
Default Value = Calculated so that the data range is
divided into NUMCLASS intervals, where the
interval is a “nice” number

CLSLMT7S

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
for the seventh spoke, one for each class.
Default Value = Calculated so that the data range is
divided into NUMCLASS intervals, where the
interval is a “nice” number

CLSLMT8S

R

Array of up to 6 maximum values for the class intervals
for the eighth spoke, one for each class.
Default Value = Calculated so that the data range is
divided into NUMCLASS intervals, where the
interval is a “nice” number

LOCATION

C*12

Location of the legend.
Default Value = OMIT
Options:
LOWER LEFT = Place legend in lower left corner, in y
offset area

R2003.12.0

LOWER
RIGHT

= Place legend in lower right corner, in y
offset area

ARBITRARY

= The lower left corner of the legend is
specified by XLOWLEFT &
YLOWLEFT

OMIT

= Do not plot legend

XLOWLEFT

R

The x position of lower left corner of the legend, in plotter
units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION = ARBITRARY.
Default Value = 1. in or 2.5 cm

YLOWLEFT

R

The y position of lower left corner of the legend, in plotter
units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION = ARBITRARY.
Default Value = 1. in or 2.5 cm

Process

150

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Post Text
Name

POST TEXT

Alternate Name P TEXT
Function

This process posts text data from a text file on an MFD to the current
picture.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be called to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is called.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• DATAIN

C*24

Name of the input posting file.

MFDIN

I

XFLD

I

Field number of the x field for text in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of the y field for text in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

TEXTFLD

I

Field number of the Text field to post.
Default Value = First Text field

FONTFLD

I

Field number of the Font field in the input file. If not
specified, font is determined by FONT parameter.
Default Value = 0

LOCFLD

I

Field number of the Text Locmod (Location Mode) field
in the input file. If not specified, location is determined by
LOCATE parameter.
Default Value = 0

SIZEFLD

I

Field number of the Text Size field in the input file. If not
specified, size is determined by CHARSIZE parameter.
Default Value = 0

ROTFLD

I

Field number of the Text Angle field in the input file. If
not specified, angle is determined by ROTATE
parameter.
Default Value = 0

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

Process

151

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FONT

C*8

Range Description and Default
Font for posted text.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX

LOCATE

C*12

Location of text relative to x,y position defined by XFLD
and YFLD.
Default Value = CENTER
Options:
LOWER LEFT = Place lower left corner of text at x,y
position

UNITS

R2003.12.0

C*12

CHARSIZE

R

ROTATE

R

FACTOR

R

COLOR

I

LOWER
RIGHT

= Place lower right corner of text at x,y
position

CENTER

= Place bottom center of text at x,y
position

Units to use for the x and y data in the file.
Default Value = SCALED
Options:
SCALED

= Map units

UNSCALED

= Plotter units

NORMALIZED

= Normalized

Height of characters, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.25 in or 0.65 cm
0.0–
360.0

Orientation of text with respect to the horizontal (positive
x axis), measured counterclockwise in degrees.
Default Value = 0.0 degrees
Scaling factor for character size.
Default Value = 1.0

0–255 Color index for posting the text.
Default Value = 12

Process

152

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Projection
Name

PROJECTION

Alternate Name PROJ
Function

This process defines the projection parameters for a new picture.
The projection is in effect until one of the following is encountered:




Notes

R2003.12.0

the PROJECTION END command
another PROJECTION command
the STOP command
See the table on the next page of this process for parameters and
projection types. Also, see the PROJECTION END Process.

Process

153

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

PROJCODE

C*32

Range Description and Default
Cartographic projection.
Default Value = UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE
MERCATOR
Options:
ALBERS EQUAL AREA
AMERICAN POLYCONIC
AZIMUTHAL GNOMONIC
AZIMUTHAL ORTHOGRAPHIC
AZIMUTHAL STEREOGRAPHIC
BIPOLAR OBLIQUE CONIC CONFORMAL
CASSINI-SOLDNER
SINGLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
DOUBLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
MODIFIED POLYCONIC
NEW ZEALAND MAP GRID
GENERAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
OBLIQUE MERCATOR
STANDARD MERCATOR
UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
VAN DER GRINTEN I

New Zealand Map Grid
Van Der Grinten I

Modified Polyconic

Double Parallel Lambert
General Transverse Mercator
Oblique Mercator
Standard Mercator
Universal Transverse Mercator

American Polyconic
Azimuthal Gnomonic
Azimuthal Orthographic
Azimuthal Stereographic
Bipolar Oblique Conic Conformal
Cassini-Soldner
Single Parallel Lambert

Parameters

Albers Equal Area

Projection Type

Names

Description (Z-MAP Plus option)

PROJCODE

Projection Code

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y Y

SPHEROID

Spheroid Code

Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y N Y

R2003.12.0

Process

154

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

UTMZONE

UTM Zone

N N N N N N N N N N N N O

N N N

HEMISPHR

Hemisphere

N N N N N N N N N N N N O

N N N

UNITCODE

Units Code

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N

Y N Y

UNITFACT

Unit Factor if IUNCOD = 1*

O O O O O O O O O O O O N

O N O

BOTTOM

Least Standard Parallel

Y N N N N N N Y Y N N N N

N N N

TOP

Greatest Standard Parallel

Y N N N N N N N Y N N N N

N N N

REFLAT

Reference Latitude

Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y N N

Y N N

LATSCALE

Latitude Scale Factor

N N N N N N N N N N N N N

Y N N

REFLONG

Reference Longitude

Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y O

Y N Y

LONSCALE

Longitude Scale Factor

N N N N N N N N N Y N N N

Y N N

FALNORTH

False Northing

O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O N O

FALEAST

False Easting

O O O O O O N O O O O O N

O O O

SEMIMAJR

Semi-Major Radius A if ISPCOD =
1†

O N O O O N O O O O O O O

O N O

SEMIMINR

Semi-Minor Radius B if ISPCOD =
1†

O N O O O N O O O O O O O

O N O

AZIMUTH

Azimuth of center line at skew origin

N N N N N N N N N N Y N N

N N N

ORGNSCLE

Scale factor at origin

N N N N N N N N N N Y N N

N N N

RADTYPE

Radius Calculation Method

N N N N N N N N N N N N N

N N Y

4

3

1

1

2

4

1

2

2

Key:
Y = parameter required

1

N = parameter not required

2

O = parameter optional; if not specified, default value is used

3

Hemisphere defines false northing for UTM

4

One or the other is required

* UNITCODE = USER SUPPLIED

† SPHEROID = USER-DEFINED

R2003.12.0

Also serves as a single standard parallel

Polyconic projection also has a central meridian with associated scale
tor

Process

155

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Projection End
Name

PROJECTION END

Alternate Name E PRJ

R2003.12.0

Function

This process signals the end of a particular projection. After finding a
PROJECTION END in the ZCL command stream, further pictures
assume no projection is active unless another PROJECTION command
is found.

Parameters

No Parameters

Process

156

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Quality Assure
Name

QUALITY ASSURE

Alternate Name CP GRID QA
Function

This process back interpolates a set of control points to a given surface.
It then calculates the difference (residual) between the interpolated z
value and the z value of the control point, and produces a statistical
analysis of residuals in the form of a histogram and printed statistical
data.
You can use Quality Assurance to:
•evaluate the quality of a dataset
•evaluate how well a grid represents the original data
•plot selected residuals to use as a guide in interactive grid editing

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• GRIDIN
MFDGRID

I
C*24

MFDIN

I

Name of the input grid file.
0–5

I

FAULTS

C*24
I

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input control point file.

0–5

C*24

MFDOUT

MFDFAULT

Range Description and Default

C*24

• DATAIN

DATAOUT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output control point file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output control point
file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0

Process

157

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

ERRANTRS

C*16

Range Description and Default
Method used to produce residuals, and type produced.
Default Value = THRESHOLDS
Options:
OMIT

= Do not produce residuals

EITHER

= Residual is selected if it qualifies by either the
thresholds or the contour crossing criteria

BOTH

= Residual is selected only if it qualifies by both
the thresholds and contour crossing criteria

THRESHOLDS

= Residual is selected if value is
outside the range of threshold
values

CONTOUR CROSSING = Residual is selected if it
elevation interpolated from
grid surface and elevation
from control point file are on
opposite sides of the plane
defined by a contour level

SELECT

R2003.12.0

C*4

Which residuals are written to the output file. Used if
DATAOUT is specified.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= All residuals are output

ONLY

= Only selected errant residuals are output

MAXRESID

R

Maximum residual for histogram.
Default Value = Based on input control data

THRESUPP

R

Upper threshold value. Used if ERRANTRS =
THRESHOLDS, EITHER, or BOTH.
Default Value = Based on input control data

THRESLOW

R

Lower threshold value. Used if ERRANTRS =
THRESHOLDS, EITHER, or BOTH.
Default Value = Based on input control data

CONINT

R

Contour interval. Used if ERRANTRS = CONTOUR
CROSSING, EITHER, or BOTH.
Default Value = Based on input control data

Process

158

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

CONMIN

R

Minimum contour level. Used if ERRANTRS =
CONTOUR CROSSING, EITHER, or BOTH.
Default Value = Based on input control data

° TOLERANC

R

Equality tolerance. If an elevation is equal to a contour
level in this tolerance, it is not considered to be across that
contour level from any elevation. Required if
ERRANTRS = CONTOUR CROSSING, EITHER, or
BOTH.
Field number of the x field in the control point file.
Default Value = First X field

XFLD

I

INFLD

I

Field number of the desired field in the control point file.
Default Value = First Z Value field

FLTXFLD

I

Field number of the x field in the input fault file.
Default Value = First X field

FLTYFLD

I

Field number of the y field in the input fault file.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the input fault
file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

Process

159

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Quick Volumetrics
Name

QUICK VOLUMETRICS

Alternate Name QUICK VOL
Function

This process provides a quick estimate of the volume between the
surface represented by the input grid and the flat surface with the
constant z value specified by the baseplane parameter (BASEPLAN),
bounded by a region specified by a polygon or polygons on an input
file specified by VERTICES. To calculate volume, this process
multiplies the area of the polygon by the numeric average of the grid
nodes in the polygon.
This process trades off accuracy for speed. Better accuracy can be
obtained by making the grid increment smaller.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

VERTICES

C*24

MFDVERT

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the polygon vertex file. If not specified, the
region of integration is the entire grid AOI.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the vertex file.
Default Value = 0

• GRIDIN

C*24

Name of the input grid file.

MFDIN

I

AREASCAL

D

Area scale factor.
Default Value = 1.0

VOLMSCAL

D

Volume scale factor.
Default Value = 1.0

BASEPLAN

R

Baseplane z value.
Default Value = 0.0

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0

Process

160

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SELECT

C*8

Range Description and Default
Which polygons in the vertex file to use in the integration
task.
Note: The maximum number of polygons that can be
integrated at one time is 500.
Default Value = ALL
Options:
ALL

= All polygons on the vertex file are used.

ONLY

= Up to 40 polygon IDs specified with
POLYIDS are used.

EXCEPT

= Up to 40 polygon IDs specified with
POLYIDS are ignored.

° POLYIDS

R

Array of up to 40 Segment IDs for polygons in input
vertices file over which volumes are calculated. Required
if SELECT = ONLY or EXCEPT.

DBIDS

I

Use number of the output DATA BLOCK for the polygon
Segment IDs that indicate which polygons were
integrated.
Default Value = 0

DBAREA

I

Use number of the output DATA BLOCK for the
computed areas.
If DATASIZE = 1 for the referenced DATA BLOCK,
then single precision values are stored. If DATASIZE = 2,
then double precision values are stored.
Default Value = 0

DBVOLM

I

Use number of the output DATA BLOCK for the
computed volumes.
If DATASIZE = 1 for the referenced DATA BLOCK,
then single precision values are stored. If DATASIZE = 2,
then double precision values are stored.
Default Value = 0

Process

161

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Random Grid
Name

RANDOMGRID

Alternate Name GRIDRAND
Function

This process generates a grid using a pseudo-random number
generator. The user selects the type of distribution, and specifies the
distribution’s parameters as constants or as grids to vary the parameters
across the AOI.
This process has been used to generate test data, and may be useful for
statistical simulations.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

PRM1GRD

C*24

PRM1MFD

I

PRM2GRD

C*24

PRM2MFD

I

FILOUT
MFDOUT

R2003.12.0

Range

Name of optional input PARAM1 grid file. If this file is
input, output grid parameters (XMIN, XMAX, YMIN,
YMAX, GXINC, GYINC) will come from it. For main
use of PARAM1 and PARAM2, see parameter
METHOD. If both PRM1GRD and PRM2GRD are
input, their grid parameters (XMIN, XMAX, YMIN,
YMAX, GXINC, GYINC) must match.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains optional input
PARAM1 grid file.
Name of optional input PARAM2 grid file. If file name
PRM1GRD is blank, and this file is input, output grid
parameters (XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX, GXINC,
GYINC) will come from it. For main use of PARAM1
and PARAM2, see parameter METHOD. If both
PRM1GRD and PRM2GRD are input, their grid
parameters (XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX, GXINC,
GYINC) must match.

0–5

C*24
I

Description and Default

Number of the MFD that contains optional input
PARAM2 grid file.
Name of the output GRID file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the output GRID file.

Process

162

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

METHOD

C*20

Gridding method.
Default Value = GAUSS SIGMA
Options:
EVEN RANGE = Evenly distributed in the range
from PARAM1 to PARAM2.
EVENDELTA=Evenlydistributedintherangefrom
(PARAM1-PARAM2) to
(PARAM1+PARAM2).
GAUSS SIGMA RANGE = Gaussian distributed with
mean = (PARAM1+PARAM2)/2
and standard deviation =
ABS((PARAM2-PARAM1)/2)
GAUSS SIGMA = Gaussian distributed with mean =
PARAM1 and standard deviation
= PARAM2.
EVEN SIGMA RANGE = Evenly distributed on a
range such that mean is (PARAM2
+ PARAM1)/2 and standard
deviation is (PARAM2 PARAM1)/2.
EVEN SIGMA = Evenly distributed on a range such
that mean is PARAM1 and
standard deviation is PARAM2.

REPORT

C*8

Extent of the Processing Analysis Report.
Default Value = PARTIAL
Options:
FULL
PARTIAL
NONE

RANDSEED

I

Default Value = Seed for Random Number Generation.
Options: Default Value = 0
Options:
= -1
Generates an arbitrary seed for a
non-reproducible sequence of
pseudo-random numbers.
<-1
Allows the system to choose the default
seed
>-1
Uses the input value as the seed

GRIDXMIN

R

Minimum X-coordinate of the gridding area. Default is
0.0.

Process

163

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

GRIDXMAX

R

Default Value = Maximum X-coordinate of the gridding
area. No default.

GRIDXINC

R

Gridding interval in the X-direction. Default is 1.0.

GRIDYMIN

R

Minimum Y-coordinate of the gridding area. Default is
0.0.

° GRIDYMAX

R

Maximum Y-coordinate of the gridding area. No default.

° GRIDYINC

R

Gridding interval in the Y-direction. Default is 1.0.

PARAM1

R

First parameter for random distribution function. See
parameter METHOD. If grid file PRM1GRD is
supplied, it’s Z-values will be substituted for this
parameter. Default is 0.0.

PARAM2

R

First parameter for random distribution function. See
parameter METHOD. If grid file PRM2GRD is
supplied, it’s Z-values will be substituted for this
parameter. Default is 1.0.

GRIDZMIN

R

Minimum allowed grid Z-value. If random value
generated is less than GRZMIN, it will be set to
GRZMIN. Default is -0.999E+30.

GRIDZMAX

R

Maximum allowed grid Z-value. If random value
generated is greater than GRZMAX, it will be set to
GRZMAX. Default is +0.999E+30.

Process

164

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Range Edit
Name

RANGE EDIT

Alternate Name
Function

This process sifts out unwanted data points from an entire dataset, a
particular seismic or cross-section line (a line name field must be
present), an area (an area name field must be present) or any character
field specified.
Using the SELECT parameter, the user can control whether to keep
data points whose numeric field value is inside or outside of the
specified range. Unless performed over the entire dataset, RANGE
EDIT only discards those points that have matching line/name/
character fields, and that do not satisfy the range criteria. All other data
points pass through to the new file.
In all instances, you must select the field to range edit, and decide upon
the upper and lower range values for that field. The default is the upper
and lower range of the selected data field.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

DATAOUT
MFDOUT
SELECT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default
Name of the input data file.
0–5

C*24
I
C*8

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output data file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.
Default Value = 1
Which points to output.
Default Value = INSIDE
Options:
INSIDE

= Output values inside range

OUTSIDE

= Output values outside range

Process

165

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

EDITTYPE

C*16

STRING

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default
Scope of Range Editing.
Default Value = ENTIRE DATASET
Options:
ENTIRE
DATASET

= Edit based on the entire dataset

LINE MATCH

= Edit based on a seismic or
cross-section line

AREA MATCH

= Edit based on an area name

TEXT MATCH

= Edit based on a text field match

C*80

String to match against a line name field or an area name
field or against some character field. Used if EDITTYPE
= LINE MATCH, AREA MATCH, or TEXT MATCH.
Default Value = Blank

TEXTFLD

I

Field number of the Character field to match. Used if
EDITTYPE = TEXT MATCH.
If EDITTYPE = AREA MATCH or LINE MATCH the
first field of type Area Name or Line Name is used.
Default Value = Blank

INFLDS

I

Array of up to 12 field numbers for the fields to edit.
Default Value = First field of the correct type

FLDMINS

I

Array of up to 12 values for the lower ranges of the
selected fields, in the same position as the corresponding
INFLDS field.
Default Value = Actual field minimum

FLDMAXS

I

Array of up to 12 values for the upper ranges of the
selected fields, in the same position as the corresponding
INFLDS field.
Default Value = Actual field maximum

Process

166

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Rasterize Faults
Name

RASTERIZE FAULTS

Alternate Name FLT RASTER
Function

This process converts a regular fault file into a rasterized fault file in
which the fault segments are parallel to the lattice rows and columns,
for use with reservoir simulators.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• LATTICE

C*24

MFDIN

I

• FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input lattice file.
0–5

Name of the input fault file.
0–5

FAULTOUT C*24
MFDOUT

R2003.12.0

I

Number of the MFD that contains the input lattice file.
Default Value = 0

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of output rasterized fault file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output rasterized fault
file.
Default Value = 1

Process

167

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Reinitialize
Name

REINITIALIZE

Alternate Name INIT
Function

This process allows you to reset both the Use Number and the Back
Reference Number back to 000. This is useful on very long ZCL runs
where you have stepped your Use Numbers by 10s or 100s and have
reached 499. By inserting a REINITIALIZE process statement, you
can start your numbering system over again.
The affect of inserting a REINITIALIZE Process statement is to cause
all ZCL processes before the statement to be executed. It also means
that you can no longer reference back to ZCL processes before the
REINITIALIZE command.

R2003.12.0

Notes

Use Number and Back Reference Number are not used by this process;
if they are included, they are ignored.

Example

REINITIALIZE:

Parameters

No Parameters

/

Process

168

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Rename MFD
Name

RENAME MFD

Alternate Name CHANGE MFD NAME
Function

This process changes the internally stored MFD name associated with
an MFD.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• MFDNAME

C*80

Disk file name of the MFD.

• HEADER

C*24

New internal name for MFD.

Process

169

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Rename Pict
Name

RENAME PICT

Alternate Name REN PIC
Function

This process renames a picture on a graphics file.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains the picture to
rename.
Default Value = Graphics file that is currently open

FROMPICT

C*80

Name of the picture to renamed.
Default Value = Picture that is currently open

C*80

Name for the new (renamed) picture.

• TOPICT

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

Process

170

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Reset Cell To Well
Name

RESET CELL TO WELL

Alternate Name CELL VAL = WELL VAL
Function

This process modifies a RESIN cell table by overriding cell values by
the value of the well falling in that same cell (if any).

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• CELLFILE

C*24

MFDCELL

I

• WELLFILE

C*24

MFDWELL

R2003.12.0

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input RESIN cell table.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input RESIN cell
table.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input well data.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input well data.
Default Value = 0

• CELLFLD

I

Field number in the cell file whose value can be
overridden by well data positioned in the cell.
Note: Fields 1–5 in a cell table file are reserved for fields
X, Y, XC, YC, and AREA.

• WELLFLD

I

Field number in the well file whose value can potentially
override the cell table file field information.

Process

171

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Rotate Data
Name

ROTATE DATA

Alternate Name ROTA
Function

This process transforms a dataset in x and y coordinates by rotating it
around a point.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

DATAOUT

Range Description and Default
Name of the input data file.
0–5

C*24

Name of the output data file.

MFDOUT

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.
Default Value = 1

ANGLE

R

0.0–
360.0

Clockwise angle for rotating data, in degrees.
Default Value = 0.0 degrees

degrees

R2003.12.0

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0

XZERO

R

The x coordinate in the input file about which data is
rotated.
Default Value = 0.0

YZERO

R

The y coordinate in the input file about which data is
rotated.
Default Value = 0.0

XROTATED

R

The x coordinate of the rotated point in the output
coordinate system.
Default Value = 0.0

YROTATED

R

The y coordinate of the rotated point in the output
coordinate system.
Default Value = 0.0

SCALE

R

Scale factor applied to the rotated x and y coordinates and
the gradients if applicable.
Default Value = 1.0

XFLD

I

Field number of x field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

Process

172

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

YFLD

I

Field number of y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

DXFLD

I

Field number of the DZ/DX field in the control point file.
Default Value = First DZ/DX field

DYFLD

I

Field number of the DZ/DY field in the control point file.
Default Value = First DZ/DY field

Process

173

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Scale Bar
Name

SCALE BAR

Alternate Name SCAL
Function

This process draws a scale bar on a picture.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SCTYPES

C*16

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 7 options indicating the type(s) of scales to
draw.
Default Value = KILOMETERS and STATUTE MILES
Options:
METERS
FEET
YARDS
INCHES
KILOMETERS
NAUTICAL MILES
STATUTE MILES
US SURVEY FEET

R2003.12.0

XLOWLEFT

R

The x position of the lower left corner of the bottom scale,
in plotter units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION =
ARBITRARY.
Default Value = 1.0 in or 2.5 cm

YLOWLEFT

R

The y position of the lower left corner of the bottom scale,
in plotter units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION =
ARBITRARY.
Default Value = 0.5 in or 1.5 cm

HEIGHT

R

Height of each scale bar excluding annotation, in plotter
units (in or cm). The height of text annotating bars is
computed as a fraction of this value.
Default Value = 0.1 in or 0.25 cm

WIDTH

R

Maximum width of scale bar excluding annotation, in
plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 3.0 in or 7.5 cm

Process

173

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

UNITCODE

C*16

Units of measurement used by the picture. Used if the
map is not projected.
Default Value = FEET
Options:
METERS
FEET
YARDS
INCHES
KILOMETERS
NAUTICAL MILES
STATUTE MILES
US SURVEY FEET

UNITFACT

R

Projected coordinates units factor, in units per meter.
Used depending on type of projection selected.
1.0

LOCATION

C*12

Position of scale bar.
Default Value = LOWER LEFT
Options:
LOWER LEFT
LOWER RIGHT
LOWER CENTER
ARBITRARY

R2003.12.0

=
=
=
=

Lower left of picture
Lower right of picture
Lower center of picture
Arbitrary location specified by
XLOWLEFT and YLOWLEFT

Process

174

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Scale Bias LNAR
Name

SCALE BIAS LNAR

Alternate Name S B LNAR
Function

This process scales or biases values for a specific line or area.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

MFDIN

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

I

FILEOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

OPNAME

C*12

Name of input file.
Range Options:
Data, contour, fault, vertex, text, cross-section,
seismic-section
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1
Operation to perform.
Default Value = SCALE LINE
Options:
SCALE
LINE
SCALE
AREA
BIAS
LINE
BIAS
AREA

LINNMFLD

R2003.12.0

I

= Multiply the values in records that match
the specified line name by PARAM value
= Multiply the values in records that match
the specified area name by PARAM value
= Add PARAM value to the values in records
that match the specified line name
= Add PARAM value to the values in records
that match the specified area name

Field number of the Line Name field. Used if OPNAME =
SCALE LINE or BIAS LINE.
Default Value = First Line Name field

Process

175

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

ARENMFLD

I

LINEAREA

C*80

Range Description and Default
Field number of the Area Name field. Used if OPNAME
= SCALE AREA or BIAS AREA.
Default Value = First Area Name field
Line or area name.
Default Value = Blank

INFLD

I

Field number of the field to scale or bias.
Default Value = First Z Value field

PARAM

R

Scale or bias value for the line or area.
Default Value = 1

Process

176

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Seis Append XY
Name

SEIS APPEND XY

Alternate Name APPEND XY
Function

This process calculates x and y coordinates for seismic shotpoints using
a coordinate reference file.
The input file has its information relative to seismic shotpoint
numbers. The coordinate reference file relates seismic shotpoint
numbers for a particular line name to x and y coordinates. The output
file has x and y coordinate fields appended to the other fields of the
input file.
The input file must contain line names and shotpoint numbers. It must
be sorted by the ZCL SORT Process by Line Name and then Shotpoint
Number. This file must be of type DATA.
The coordinate reference file must contain Line Name, Shotpoint
Number, X- and Y fields. This file must also be sorted by the ZCL
SORT Process by Line Name and then Shotpoint Number.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

• COORDIN

C*24

MFDCOORD

DATAOUT
MFDOUT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

Range Description and Default
Name of the input data file.
0–5

Name of the input coordinate reference file.
0–5

C*24
I

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

Number of the MFD that contains the input reference
coordinate file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output data file.
Default Value = Based on the input data file name

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1

Process

177

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

BRKTOLR

R

Numbering interval break tolerance. This is the difference
between the shotpoint numbers of successive points on
the coordinate reference file.
This tolerance is used to initially determine if successive
points on the coordinate reference file are close enough to
use for interpolation or extrapolation. If the value of
BRKTOLR is smaller than INTTOLR or EXTTOLR,
then those parameters have no effect. Usually either
BRKTOLR is larger than the values for INTTOLR or
EXTTOLR, or BRKTOLR is equal to the value of
INTTOLR.
Default Value = 100,000,000.0

DISTOLR

R

Distance break tolerance.
This distance is used after BRKTOLR to determine if two
successive points on the coordinate reference file are
close enough to use for interpolation or extrapolation.
Default Value = 100,000,000.0

INTTOLR

R

Interpolation numbering interval tolerance.
After two points on the coordinate reference file have
been selected to use for interpolation, and have satisfied
the limits imposed by parameters BRKTOLR and
DISTOLR, then this parameter comes into play. If the
shotpoint number interval between those points exceeds
INTTOLR, then the possibility of performing
interpolation is ruled out, and the possibility of
extrapolation is considered.
Default Value = 100,000,000.0

EXTTOLR

R

Extrapolation numbering interval tolerance.
The interval between the shotpoint number of the input
point and the shotpoint number of the closest coordinate
reference input point is compared to this extrapolation
interval tolerance parameter. If that interval exceeds
EXTTOLR, then extrapolation is not performed for that
point.
Default Value = 100,000,000.0

C*80

Name of output exception report disk file.
This file reports any input point for which an X,Y value
could not be determined because of one of the tests
associated with the above parameters. It reports any break
situation detected near an input record. Breaks that are not
near an input record are not reported.
Default Value = Blank

REPORT

R2003.12.0

Range Description and Default

Process

178

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Seis Interp Thin
Name

SEIS INTERP THIN

Alternate Name SEIS THIN
Function

This process performs seismic interpolation data thinning for a
specified shotpoint increment.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

DATAOUT
MFDOUT
• SHPTINC

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default
Name of the input data file.
0–5

C*24
I

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output data file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.
Default Value = 1

R

Shotpoint increment.

XFLD

I

Field number of X field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of Y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

SHTPTFLD

I

Field number of the Shotpoint Number field.
Default Value = First Shotpoint Number field

LINNMFLD

I

Field number of the Line Name field.
Default Value = First Line Name field

LINUMFLD

I

Field number of the Line Number field in the input data
file.
Default Value = First Line Number field

Process

179

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Select Posting Parameters
Modulation-Range
Set the current posting parameters based on the index of the
matching selection criteria (see “Select Seismic Data To Post” on
page 209). The Modulation-Range is set up if any posted items
rely on the Modulation-field. The user can specify one of the
options shown for ZRNGMODE (as described in the “Post
Seismic New” topic) to create the Modulation-Range.
If the user specifies TYPE IN, the user creates the
Modulation-Range table manually by entering up to 50 values.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, the user specifies the number of
levels to use for dividing the maximum/minimum modulation
range (from the parameter header record).
If the user specifies INC, the user specifies an increment to use
for increasing each level of the Modulation-Range table, starting
with the data field’s minimum value.
If the user specifies INC+START, the user specifies a start value
and an increment to use for increasing each level of the
Modulation-Range table.
Size Table
The Size table is set up if any posted items rely on a modulated
size. The user can specify one of the options shown for
SIZETMOD (as described in the “Post Seismic New” topic) to
create the Size table.
If the user specifies TYPE IN, the user creates the Size table
manually by entering up to 50 values.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, the user specifies the number of
levels to use for dividing the size value range.
If the user specifies INC, the user specifies an increment to use
for increasing each level of the Size table, starting with a
minimum size value.
If the user specifies INC+START, the user specifies a start value
and an increment to use for increasing each level of the Size
table.

R2003.12.0

Process

180

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Apply Posting Parameters
Extract 3D Elements To Post
Select 3D Track Lines To Post
The user specifies which track lines in the 3D Seismic Survey to
post. The supported options are shown for 3DTKMODE (as
described in the “Post Seismic New” topic).
If the user specifies ALL, all track lines in the 3D Seismic survey
are posted.
If the user specifies RATE, the first, last, and each 3DTKRATEth
track line starting with 3DTKSTRT track number is posted.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, the first, last, and each track
number plus a bias evenly divisible by a user-specified value are
posted.
If the user specifies NONE, no 3D track lines are posted.
Convert 3D Track Line to 2D Track Line
So that the down-stream processes can treat track line data from
3D surveys the same as data from 2D Seismic surveys, this
process converts 3D track line data to 2D track line data.
The sort key information is read to determine how to treat the 3D
track line. If the data is sorted 3D Survey Name, 3D Line
Number, 3D Shotpoint Number, then the line name is assigned to
the 3D Line Number, and the shotpoint numbers are equated with
the 3D Shotpoint Number. If, however, the data is sorted 3D
Survey Name, 3D Shotpoint Number, 3D Line Number, then the
line name is assigned to the 3D Shotpoint Number and the
shotpoint number is assigned to the 3D Line Number.
Apply Shotpoint Symbol Parameters
Select Shotpoints To Post
The user specifies which shotpoints to post. The supported
options are shown for SYMPSTMD (as described in the “Post
Seismic New” topic).
If the user specifies ALL, all shotpoints are posted.

R2003.12.0

Process

181

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

If the user specifies RATE, the shotpoints at the endpoints of the
seismic line, and each POSTRATEth shotpoint starting with the
POSTADDth shotpoint are posted.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, these shotpoints are posted: The
shotpoints at the endpoints of the seismic line and each shotpoint
number plus POSTADD that is evenly divisible by POSTRATE.
If the user specifies INTERVAL, each shotpoint that is at least
POSTRATE distance from the previous shotpoint is posted.
If the user specifies NONE, no shotpoints on the matched track
line are posted.
If Discontinuity Usage is enabled, each shotpoint at a
discontinuity is also posted if SYMPSTMD = RATE, DIVIDE,
or INTERVAL.
After selecting the shotpoints, this process verifies that two
consecutive shotpoints are not within a user-specified distance
from each other.
Determine Shotpoint Symbol Size
The user has several options for controlling the size of the posted
shotpoint symbol; a field in the data can be specified as having
the symbol size as data, a field in the data can be specified whose
data is used to look up the size of the symbol in a table, or a size
value specific to the matched selection criteria can be entered.
If the user has specified that discontinuities should be used, and
the current shotpoint falls at a discontinuity point, the size of the
symbol is scaled by a user-supplied discontinuity Symbol Size
Ratio.
Determine Shotpoint Symbol Code
The user has two options for controlling the symbol used for the
shotpoint; a field in the data can be specified as having the
symbol code as data or a symbol code specific to the matched
selection criteria can be entered.

R2003.12.0

Process

182

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

If the user has specified that discontinuities should be used, and
the current shotpoint falls at a discontinuity point or in a
discontinuity, the data in the discontinuity field is used to look up
the symbol in a user-configured Symbol table. If the data in the
discontinuity field is not a valid index in the Symbol table, the
normal symbol for the line is used and a diagnostic message is
generated.
The Symbol table is a flat file that the user can configure as
desired. The file consists of two columns: discontinuity code and
symbol code.
The file is self-documented with more specifics about its format.
Seismic posting first looks in the user’s home directory for the
symbol code file — $HOME/.zplus_disconts_codes
If this file is not found, seismic posting looks in the standard files
directory — $DISCONT/files/Discont_codes
If not found there, no discontinuity symbol code field is used.
Example .Zplus_disconts_codes File
# .Zplus_disconts_codes is used by the POSTSEISMICNEW algorithm.
# It maps discontinuity values into symbol codes.
# Rules: Columns 1-10 are discontinuity values
# Columns 11-20 are the mapped symbol codes
# ’#’ in column 1 begins a comment
# Line width limited to 80 characters
#
# 1 2
# line below calibrates column positions 1-25
#234567890123456789012345
3.0
4.0
1.0
2.0

19
10
3
14

The values on the left are discontinuity codes. The values opposite them on the right
are the symbol code associated with each discontinuity code.

Determine Shotpoint Symbol Color
The user has several options for controlling the color of the
posted shotpoint symbol; a field in the data can be specified as
having the symbol color as data; a field in the data can be
specified whose data is used to look up the color of the symbol in
a table; or a color value specific to the matched selection criteria
can be entered.

R2003.12.0

Process

183

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Apply 3D Survey Name Parameters
The font of the 3D survey name label can be specified as a field
in the data, or as a font value specific to the matched selection
criteria.
The size of the 3D survey name label can be specified as a field
in the data, or as a size value specific to the matched selection
criteria.
The color for the 3D survey name label can be specified as a field
in the data, or as a color value specific to the matched selection
criteria.
The options for specifying the location of the 3D survey name
are specified in the he 3D Survey Name Locations table. These
options are illustrated below:
BOTH+LINE or
START+LINE

BOTH+LINE or
END+LINE

BOTH+SHOT or
START+SHOT

BOTH+SHOT or
END+SHOT

CENTER

For each selection criteria, the user can specify an angle that
incrementally changes the orientation of the label. The
incremental angle specifies the additional counterclockwise
angle applied to the default orientation for the survey name using
the center of the label as the rotation point.

R2003.12.0

Process

184

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Verify Label Visibility
By default, 2D/3D line names and 3D survey names are not
posted if they fall partially or totally outside the border AOI
region. However, the user optionally can tell seismic posting to
attempt to reposition these labels according to these criteria:
• 2D/3D Line Names. Place the label immediately outside the
border AOI.
• 3D Survey Names. First any add-on label angle is removed;
if the label is still obscured, an attempt is made to “slide” the
label back inside the border AOI; if this fails, a diagnostic
message is issued.
Apply Track Line Posting Parameters
Select Track Line Points
The user can specify that track lines be drawn with only the
points posed with shotpoints, or all points in the data set for that
seismic line.
Determine Track Line Weight
The line weight of a track line can be specified as a field in the
data, or as a weight value specific to the matched selection
criteria.
Determine Track Line Pattern
The line pattern of a track line can be specified as a field in the
data, or, as a line pattern value specific to the matched selection
criteria.
If the user has specified that discontinuities are acknowledged,
and the line is in a discontinuity, the line pattern can be set from a
user-specified discontinuity line pattern specific to the matched
selection criteria.

R2003.12.0

Process

185

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Determine Track Line Color
The user has several options for controlling the color of the
posted track line; a field in the data can be specified as having the
track line color as data; a field in the data can be specified whose
data is used to look up the color of the track line in a table; or a
color value specific to the matched selection criteria can be
entered.
Apply Shotpoint Label Parameters
Select Shotpoint Numbers To Post
The user specifies which shotpoint numbers to post. The
supported options are shown for SYMLABMD (as described in
the “Post Seismic New” topic).
If the user specifies ALL, a shotpoint number is posted at each
posted shotpoint symbol.
If the user specifies RATE, the shotpoint numbers at the
endpoints of the seismic line, and each LABLRATEth shotpoint
number starting with the LABLADDth shotpoint number is
posted.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, the shotpoint number at the
endpoints of the seismic line, and each shotpoint number where
shotpoint number plus LABLADD is evenly divisible by
LABLRATE is posted.
If the user specifies INTERVAL, each shotpoint number that is at
least LABLRATE distance from the previous shotpoint is posted.
If the user specifies NONE, no shotpoint numbers are posted.
If Discontinuity Usage is enabled, each shotpoint at a
discontinuity are also posted if SYMLABMD = RATE, DIVIDE,
or INTERVAL.
After the user selects the shotpoint numbers, this process verifies
that two consecutive shotpoint numbers are not within a
user-specified distance from each other.

R2003.12.0

Process

186

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Determine Shotpoint Label Color
The user has two options for controlling the color of the posted
shotpoint number; a field in the data can be specified as having
the label color as data, or a color value specific to the matched
selection criteria can be entered.
Set Shotpoint Number Parameters
The location of the shotpoint number is specific to the matched
selection criteria. The supported options are shown for SYMLABMD
(as described in the “Post Seismic New” topic). If the seismic line
contains only a single point, the orientation of the label is 0 degrees
with respect to the x axis; otherwise the default orientation of the label
is perpendicular to the line.
The user can specify a selection specific label size for the shotpoint
number.
The user can specify an angle that incrementally changes the
orientation of the label. The incremental angle is specified as the
number of the counterclockwise degrees to add to the default
orientation of the label as rotated around the shotpoint.
If a Reshot Character field is available in the data file, the
character contained in the field is appended to the shotpoint label.

R2003.12.0

Process

187

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Apply Attribute Label Parameters
Select Attribute Labels To Post
The user specifies which attribute labels to post. The supported
options are shown for ATTBMODE (as described in the “Post
Seismic New” topic).
If the user specifies ALL, an attribute label is posted at each
posted shotpoint symbol.
If the user specifies RATE, the attribute labels at the endpoints of
the seismic line, and each ATTBRATEth attribute label starting
with the ATTBADDth attribute label is posted.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, the attribute labels at the endpoints
of the seismic line, and each attribute label where shotpoint
number plus ATTBADD is evenly divisible by ATTBRATE is
posted.
If the user specifies INTERVAL, each attribute label that is at
least ATTBRATE distance from the previous attribute label is
posted.
If the user specifies NONE, no attribute labels are posted.
If Discontinuity Usage is enabled, each shotpoint at a
discontinuity is also labeled if ATTBMODE = RATE, DIVIDE,
or INTERVAL.
Determine Attribute Color
The user has two options for controlling the color of the posted
attribute label; a field in the data can be specified as having the
label color as data; or, a color value specific to the matched
selection criteria can be entered.

R2003.12.0

Process

188

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Set Attribute Label Parameters
The location of the attribute label is specific to the matched
selection criteria. The supported options are shown for
ATTBMODE (as described in the “Post Seismic New” topic). If
the seismic line contains only a single point, the orientation of
the label is 0 degrees with respect to the x axis; otherwise, the
default orientation of the label is perpendicular to the line.
The user can specify a selection specific label size for the
attribute label.
The user can specify an angle that incrementally changes the
orientation of the label. The incremental angle is specified as the
number of counter-clockwise degrees to add to the default
orientation of the label as rotated around the shotpoint.
Adjust Symbol Angle
The orientation of each shotpoint symbol to post is adjusted
based on the angle of the track line to which it is attached. If the
seismic line contains only a single point, the symbol is posted as
if the line were parallel to the x axis.
Partition Track Line Using Shotpoint Breaks
A track line can be broken up into several segments by applying
tests to consecutive shotpoints.
• If the difference between two consecutive shotpoint numbers
is greater than a user-specified value, the track line is broken.
• If the distance between two consecutive shotpoints is greater
than a user-specified value, the track line is broken.

R2003.12.0

Process

189

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Apply Line Name Posting Parameters
Select Line Names To Post
The user specifies which track lines are posted with line names.
The supported options are shown for 3DLNMODE (as described
in the “Post Seismic New” topic).
If the user specifies ALL, all track lines are posted with a line
name.
If the user specifies RATE, the first, last, and each 3DLNRATEth
line name starting with 3DLNSTRT line number are posted.
If the user specifies DIVIDE, a line name for the first, last, and
each 3D line number evenly divisible by a user-specified value
are posted.
If the user specifies NONE, no line names are posted.
Set Line Name Posting Parameters
If the line name is being posted from a Line Name field (2D
seismic data), the font of the label can be specified as a field in
the data, or as a font value specific to the matched selection
criteria. If the line name is being posted from a Seismic Line
Number or 3D Line Number field, the font defaults to PLAIN.
The size of the line name label can be specified as a field in the
data, or as a size value specific to the matched selection criteria.
The color of the line name label can be specified as a field in the
data, or as a color value specific to the matched selection criteria.
The supported options for the location of the line name are
shown for LNLOCATE (as described in the “Post Seismic New”
topic). If LNORIENT = LINE, the label is oriented parallel to the
track line; if LNORIENT = X-AXIS, the label is oriented parallel
to the x axis. If the seismic line contains only a single point, the
orientation of the line name is set as if the line were parallel to
the x axis. If you specify LINE, the angle of the line is calculated
by using the endpoint and the next nearest point.
The user can specify an angle that incrementally changes the
orientation of the label. The incremental angle is the number of
counter-clockwise degrees to add to the default orientation of the
label using a center of rotation around the nearest shotpoint.

R2003.12.0

Process

190

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Select
Name

SELECT

Alternate Name DATA SUBSETTING
Function

This process extracts a subset of data from a data file according to
criteria tailored to meet the needs of the cartographic community:

• the value of a field lies in a range of values (a range edit)
• a record satisfies a thinning criterion (a thinning edit)
• a point is located inside or outside a polygon (a location edit)
This process copies records that meet the specified criteria to the
output dataset without modifying them. The order of the selected
points in the output dataset is preserved from the input dataset. Since
the order of the points is preserved in the output dataset, sort flags
attached to the input dataset are preserved in the output dataset also.
Valid Combinations for parameter FILEIN
This chart depicts which edit options can be used on different file
types. It also depicts the criteria for sorting the input file (FILEIN).
File Type

Location

Thinning

Range

DATA (random)

OK

OK

OK

DATA (seismic)

1

2

OK

CNTR

3

3

3

FALT

3

3

3

VERT

3

3

3

TEXT

OK

OK

OK

SSEC

N/A

3

3

XSEC

N/A

3

3

DWEL

3

3

OK

OK = The success of the operation does not depend on the order of the
points in the file.
N/A = The operation is not performed by SELECT.
1 = If the extra points outside the select area are retained, the file
must be sorted in line name, shotpoint order.
2 = The file must be sorted in line name, shotpoint order.
3 = The order of the points in the file should be as they were loaded or
generated.

R2003.12.0

Process

191

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Valid Combinations for parameters XFLD and YFLD
This table depicts which fields from the input file (FILEIN) are needed
and/or used in a location edit.
Type of Coordinates in the File
SLCTSRCE

XY

LL

XY&LL

XY

1

N/A

2

ROTATEDXY

1

N/A

2

LL

3

1

4

ROTATEDLL

5

N/A

6

GRID

1

N/A

2

DATA – XY only

7

N/A

8

DATA – LL only

9

10

11

DATA – XY & LL

12

11

11

PICTURE – not projected

1

N/A

2

PICTURE – projected

3

1

4

POLYGON

1

N/A

2

Key:
N/A

= SELECT does not process this case.

1

= Coordinates are of the same type. SELECT performs a simple “point-in-polygon” check.

2

= The latitude/longitude fields are ignored. SELECT performs a simple “point-in-polygon” check with the
XY fields.

3

= If the file contains projection parameters, they are used to transform the LL coordinates of the corner
points of a selected area rectangle to XY coordinates. SELECT then expands this rectangle by 10%
along each side of each rectangle. Processing is performed as in case 1 above.

4

= The XY coordinates on the file are ignored. Processing is performed as in case 1 above.

5

= If the file contains projection parameters, they are used to transform the LL coordinates of the origin of a
selected rectangle to XY coordinates. Processing is performed as in case 1 above.
If the file does not contain projection parameters, SELECT detects an error condition and returns control
to the calling module without performing any processing.

6

= The LL coordinates are ignored. Processing is performed as in case 5 above.

7

= The data file must contain XY coordinates. SELECT sets the selected area to the smallest
circumscribing rectangle for the data expanded by 1% on all sides.

8

= The LL coordinates in the file are ignored and processing is performed as in case 7 above.

9

= The SELECT file must contain projection information. The selected area is determined in LL as in case
7 above, it is transformed to XY coordinates using the projection parameters, and then expanded by 10%
on all four sides.

10

= The selected area is calculated in LL as in case 7 above, it is expanded by 1% on all four sides, and it is
then applied to the LL fields in the selected file.

11

= The XY coordinates are ignored. The selected file is processed as in case 10 above.

12

= The LL coordinates are ignored. The selected file is processed as in case 7 above.

R2003.12.0

Process

192

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Valid Combinations for parameter LINIDFLD
Field Type
File
Type

X
Field

Y
Field

Seg
ID

DATA
seismic
CNTR

Line
No.

Line
Nam
e

*

*

Horizo
n
Name

Req

VERT

Req

SSEC

*

*

XSEC

*

*

DWEL
*

Well
Nam
e

*

*

Req

FALT

Req

Well
Trac
k

= The input file is required to have this field.
= The input file is required to have one of these fields:
For SSEC or XSEC files, the preference is given to the horizon name field for
thinning purposes.
For DWEL file the preference is given to the well track field for thinning
purposes.

Valid Combinations for parameters WLDMULTI & WLDSINGL
You can specify masks for text fields using the wildcard characters
asterisk (*) and percent sign (%).
The SELECT function interprets the asterisk to match 0 or more
characters. For example, the mask LINE* matches any string that has
the first four characters LINE but does not match the string “ LINE”.
The mask LINE*1 matches the following strings:
LINE 1
LINE1

LINE 01
LINE01

LINE 11
LINE#1

LINE 21
LINEXXX1

but does not match the string “LINE 10”.
The SELECT function interprets the percent sign to match exactly one
character. For example, the mask LINE% matches any string that
contains five characters with the first four being LINE but does not
match “ LINE”. The mask LINE%1 matches the following strings:
LINE 1

LINE21

LINE31

LINE41

but does not match the strings “LINE1” or “ LINE 1” (note that the
first character of this string is a blank).
A mask can contain more than one wildcard character. For example,
the mask %A* matches all strings that contains the letter A in the
second position.

R2003.12.0

Process

193

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

You can redefine the wildcard characters by using the WLDMULTI
and WLDSINGL parameters. SELECT does not allow the multi-place
and single-place wildcard characters to be the same character.
Valid Combinations for parameters THINOPER & RNGOPERS for thinning edit
Comparison Operators
EQ

= equal to VALUE

NE

= not equal to VALUE

LT

= less than VALUE

LE

= less than or equal to VALUE

GT

= greater than VALUE

GE

= greater than or equal to VALUE

BETWEEN

= between two VALUEs; the values are included

OUTSIDE

= not in the interval bounded by two VALUEs (endpoints
not included)

NOTNULL

= not equal to the NULL VALUE for the field

NULL

= equal to the NULL VALUE for the field

VALUE represents a number or character string. The type of VALUE must
be the same type as that of the field under consideration.

The operators EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, and GE compare the value of a
field to a user-specified value. For a Thinning Edit, you must specify
THNTXTAS if the field is a text field or THNVALAS if the field is a
numeric field. For a Range Edit, you must specify RNGTXTAS if the
field is a text field or RNGVALAS if the field is a numeric field. The
parameters THNTXTBS, THNVALBS, RNGTXTBS, and
RNGVALBS are ignored for each of these operators.
You must specify both endpoints of the range for the BETWEEN and
OUTSIDE operators. For a Thinning Edit, the BETWEEN and
OUTSIDE operators are related to the limits parameters as follows:

• BETWEEN: text field ≥THNTXTAS and text field
≤THNTXTBS
• OUTSIDE: numeric field <THNVALAS or numeric field
>THNVALBS
For a Range Edit, the BETWEEN and OUTSIDE operators are related
to the limits parameters as follows:

• BETWEEN: text field ≥RNGTXTAS and text field
≤RNGTXTBS
• OUTSIDE: numeric field <RNGVALAS or numeric field
>RNGVALBS

R2003.12.0

Process

194

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

SELECT requires that:

• THNTXTAS < THNTXTBS
• THNVALAS < THNVALBS
• RNGTXTAS < RNGTXTBS
• RNGVALAS < RNGVALBS
For character fields, the relationship of one string to another depends
on the native character collating sequence of the computer executing
the program.
Valid Combinations for parameter EXTRA for location edit
This is an illustration of EXTRA points. Filled points are retained;
open points are discarded; points marked X are retained if EXTRA =
YES.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

R2003.12.0

for input file
Data
Type

Range Description and Default

C*24

MFDIN

I

XFLD

I

Name of the input file. See “Valid Combinations” on
page 191 for further details.
Range Options:
Data, contour, fault, line data, text, seismic-section,
cross-section, and deviated well files
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Field number of the x or Longitude coordinates in the
input file. An X field is required if THINMODE =
ENDPOINTS+DISTANCE. An X field or Longitude
field is required for a location edit. See “Valid
Combinations” on page 192 for further details.
Default Value = First field of the correct type to use

Process

195

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

YFLD

I

Field number of the y or Latitude coordinates in the input
file. A Y field is required if THINMODE =
ENDPOINTS+DISTANCE. A Y field or Latitude field is
required for a location edit. See “Valid Combinations” on
page 192 for further details.
Default Value = First field of the correct type to use

SHTPTFLD

I

Field number of the shotpoint values in the input file.
Used for thinning edit if THINMODE =
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE.
Default Value = First shotpoint field

LINIDFLD

I

Field number of the Line Name, Line Number, Horizon
Name, Segment ID, Well Tract, Well Platform, or X field
in input file. See “Valid Combinations” on page 193 for
further details.
This field is used as the control comparison field as
mentioned by THINOPER. For some file types, it is also
used to differentiate between line segments. It is used for
line data defined as seismic data, contour, fault, vertex,
seismic-section, cross-section, or deviated well file types.
Default Value = First field of the correct type

FILEOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

Name of the output file.
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1

WLDMULTI C*1

Wildcard character that matches zero or more characters.
Used to specify masks for text fields for thinning and
range editing. See “Valid Combinations” on page 193 for
further details.
Default Value = * (asterisk)

WLDSINGL

Wildcard character that matches exactly one character.
Used to specify masks for text fields for thinning and
range editing. See “Valid Combinations” on page 193 for
further details.
Default Value = % (percent)

C*1

Process

196

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameters

for Location Edit — selecting data by polygons
You can select those records from a dataset that are located either
inside or outside a polygon, called the selected area. The selected area
can be specified by one of the following methods:

• as the union of up to 10 rectangles that can be rotated relative
to a horizontal axis
• as the union of polygons specified in a vertex file
• as the area encompassed by a grid file
• as the area encompassed by a picture residing in a graphics
file
• as the area defined by data points in a data file
Points that lie on the boundary of a polygon are considered to be inside
the polygon.
For line-oriented data, you can instruct the SELECT process to retain
points on a line that are immediately across the boundary of the
polygon. For example, to retain only those points on a seismic line that
lie inside a polygon, instruct the SELECT process to also retain an
extra point immediately outside the polygon wherever the polygon cuts
the line. See “Valid Combinations” on page 195. This feature allows
the characteristics of the line to extend to the boundary of the polygon.
The SELECT function observes only one type of limit parameters
specified with the SLCTSRCE parameter. For example, if SLCTSRCE
= GRID, then other limit parameters such as XMIN, YMIN,
MNLATDEG are ignored.

R2003.12.0

Process

197

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

If the selected area is specified in terms of multiple polygons, the
SELECT function considers the selected area to be the union of the
polygons. Therefore, if RETAIN = INSIDE, any point that resides
inside any of the polygons is retained in the output file.
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SLCTSRCE

C*12

Range Description and Default
Defines how the selected area limits are specified for
location edit.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE
XY

= Location edit is not desired
= Up to 10 area limits are defined by
Northing/Easting coordinates: XMINS,
XMAXS, YMINS, YMAXS
LL
= Up to 10 area limits are defined by
Latitude/Longitude coordinates in degrees,
minutes, and seconds: MNLONDGS,
MNLONMNS, MNLONSCS,
MXLONDGS, MXLONMNS,
MXLONSCS, MNLATDGS,
MNLATMNS, MNLATSCS,
MXLATDGS, MXLATMNS,
MXLATSCS
GRID
= Area limits are defined by input grid file
GRIDNAME
DATA
= Area limits are defined by input data file
DATAIN
PICTURE
= Area limits are defined by input picture
PICTURE
POLYGON
= Up to 10 area limits can be defined by
POLYIDS and input vertex file
POLYGONS; all of the polygons are
used if POLYIDS is not specified
ROTATEDXY
= Up to 10 area limits are defined by
Northing/Easting coordinates:
XORIGINS, YORIGINS,
ANGLES, SIDEAS, SIDEBS
ROTATEDLL
= Up to 10 area limits are defined by
Latitude/Longitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes, seconds:
LONORDGS, LONORMNS,
LONORSCS LATORDGS

R2003.12.0

Process

198

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

RETAIN

C*8

Range Description and Default
Which points are retained. Important if user specifies a
location edit on line-oriented data, such as seismic data,
fault, vertex, contour, or deviated well files.
Default Value = INSIDE
Options:
b
INSIDE
OUTSIDE

EXTRA

C*4

= Retain the points inside the selected area
= Retain the points outside the selected
area

Inclusion of points on a line that lie immediately outside
the selected area. Valid for line data, i.e. seismic data,
fault, vertex, contour, or deviated well file type. See
“Valid Combinations” on page 195 for further details.
Default Value = NO
Options:
NO
YES

= Do not include the points
= Include the points

Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = XY
Values in the same position of the arrays in this group define the
corners of a polygon.

R2003.12.0

° XMINS

D

Array of up to 10 x coordinate values defining the
minimum x coordinate of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = XY and XFLD is
X (EASTING) field type.

° XMAXS

D

Array of up to 10 x coordinate values defining the
maximum x coordinate of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = XY and XFLD is
X (EASTING) field type.

° YMINS

D

Array of up to 10 y coordinate values defining the
minimum y coordinate of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = XY and YFLD is
Y (NORTHING) field type.

° YMAXS

D

Array of up to 10 y coordinate values defining the
maximum y coordinate of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = XY and YFLD is
Y (NORTHING) field type.

Process

199

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = LL
Values in the same position of the arrays in this group define the
corners of a polygon.

R2003.12.0

° MNLONDGS

I

Array of up to 10 Longitude values defining the minimum
Longitude, degrees, of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = LL and XFLD is Longitude
field type.
Array of up to 10 Longitude values defining the minimum
Longitude, minutes, of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = LL and XFLD is Longitude
field type.

° MNLONMNS

I

° MNLONSCS

I

Array of up to 10 Longitude values defining the minimum
Longitude, seconds, of the selected area rectangle.
Required if SLCTSRCE = LL and XFLD is Longitude
field type.

° MXLONDGS

I

Array of up to 10 Longitude values defining the
maximum Longitude, degrees, of the selected area
rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE = LL and XFLD is
Longitude field type.

° MXLONMNS

I

Array of up to 10 Longitude values defining the
maximum Longitude, minutes, of the selected area
rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE = LL and XFLD is
Longitude field type.

° MXLONSCS

I

Array of up to 10 Longitude values defining the
maximum Longitude, seconds, of the selected area
rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE = LL and XFLD is
Longitude field type.

° MNLATDGS

I

Array of up to 10 Latitude values defining the minimum
Latitude, degrees, of the selected area rectangle. Required
if SLCTSRCE = LL and YFLD is Latitude field type.

° MNLATMNS

I

Array of up to 10 Latitude values defining the minimum
Latitude, minutes, of the selected area rectangle. Required
if SLCTSRCE = LL and YFLD is Latitude field type.

° MNLATSCS

I

Array of up to 10 Latitude values defining the minimum
Latitude, seconds, of the selected area rectangle. Required
if SLCTSRCE = LL and YFLD is Latitude field type.

° MXLATDGS

I

Array of up to 10 Latitude values defining the maximum
Latitude, degrees, of the selected area rectangle. Required
if SLCTSRCE = LL and YFLD is Latitude field type.

Process

200

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

° MXLATMNS

I

Array of up to 10 Latitude values defining the maximum
Latitude, minutes, of the selected area rectangle. Required
if SLCTSRCE = LL and YFLD is Latitude field type.

° MXLATSCS

I

Array of up to 10 Latitude values defining the maximum
Latitude seconds, of the selected area rectangle. Required
if SLCTSRCE = LL and YFLD is Latitude field type.

Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = ROTATEDXY
Values in the same position of the arrays in this group define a
polygon.

° XORIGINS

D

Array of up to 10 x coordinate values defining the x
coordinate of the selected area rectangle, map units.
Required if SLCTSRCE = ROTATEDXY and XFLD is X
(Easting) field type.

° YORIGINS

D

Array of up to 10 y coordinate values defining the y
coordinate of the selected area rectangle, map units.
Required if SLCTSRCE = ROTATEDXY and YFLD is Y
(Northing) field type.

ANGLES

R

Array of up to 10 angles of rotation, degrees, of the
selected area. Angle measured counterclockwise from an
unrotated x axis. Used if SLCTSRCE = ROTATEDXY.
Default Value = 0.0

° SIDEAS

D

Array of up to 10 x directions defining the extent of the
selected area, map units, before the ANGLE is applied to
the selected area. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDXY.

° SIDEBS

D

Array of up to 10 y directions defining the extent of the
selected area, map units, before the ANGLE is applied to
the selected area. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDXY.

Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = ROTATEDLL
Values in the same position of the arrays in this group define a
polygon.

R2003.12.0

° LONORDGS

I

Array of up to 10 values defining the Longitude, degrees,
of the selected area rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDLL and XFLD is Longitude field type.

° LONORMNS

I

Array of up to 10 values defining the Longitude, minutes,
of the selected area rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDLL and XFLD is Longitude field type.

Process

201

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

° LONORSCS

I

Array of up to 10 values defining the Longitude, seconds,
of the selected area rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDLL and XFLD is Longitude field type.

° LATORDGS

I

Array of up to 10 values defining the Latitude, degrees, of
the selected area rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDLL and YFLD is Latitude field type.

° LATORMNS

I

Array of up to 10 values defining the Latitude, minutes, of
the selected area rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDLL and YFLD is Latitude field type.

° LATORSCS

I

Array of up to 10 values defining the Latitude, seconds, of
the selected area rectangle. Required if SLCTSRCE =
ROTATEDLL and YFLD is Latitude field type.

Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = POLYGON
POLYGONS C*24
MFDPOLY

I

POLYIDS

R

Name of the input vertex file. Used if SLCTSRCE =
POLYGON.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input vertex file.
Used if SLCTSRCE = POLYGON.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 10 Segment ID values defining the
Segment ID(s) of the polygon(s) to use. If POLYIDS = 0
or POLYIDS is omitted, then all the polygons in the input
vertex file are used, even if the number of polygons
exceed 10. Used if SLCTSRCE = POLYGON.

Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = DATA

° DATAIN

R2003.12.0

C*24

Name of the input data file that defines the selected area
limits for this operation. Required if SLCTSRCE =
DATA.

DATAMFD

I

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file. Used
if SLCTSRCE = DATA.
Default Value = 0

DATAXFLD

I

Field number of the x or Longitude values in the input
data file. Used if SLCTSRCE = DATA.
Default Value = First field of the correct type

DATAYFLD

I

Field number of the y or Latitude values in the input data
file. Used if SLCTSRCE = DATA.
Default Value = First field of the correct type to use.

Process

202

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = GRID

° GRIDNAME C*24

MFDGRID

I

Name of the input grid file that defines the selected area
limits for this operation. Required if SLCTSRCE =
GRID.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid file.
Used if SLCTSRCE = GRID.

Parameters for Location Edit if SLCTSRCE = PICTURE

° PICTURE

C*80

Name of the picture that defines the selected area limits
for this operation. Required if SLCTSRCE = PICTURE.

° ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of the graphics file that contains picture. Required
if SLCTSRCE = PICTURE.

Parameters

for Thinning Edit
A thinning edit selects points from a dataset of randomly spaced points
by retaining points based on where the record for the point is located in
the file, reducing the volume of data without regard for its spatial
distribution.
For a line-oriented dataset such as a seismic or fault dataset, the
thinning criteria can be applied on a line-by-line basis instead of on a
file basis. For example, you can specify that SELECT retain the first,
last, and every third point on each line in a file. SELECT uses the line
name or segment identifier field to determine where lines begin and
end on the file. You can specify a mask for the line name so that a
subset of the lines in a dataset can be thinned.
Due to the way SELECT determines where a line begins and ends, it is
important that a line-oriented file be properly sorted. For example, a
seismic data file must be sorted on line name as a primary sort field
followed by shotpoint number as a secondary sort field. SELECT
verifies that a file is properly sorted, but does not automatically sort the
file. The user is responsible for properly sorting a file using other
processes.
The sort order is important for seismic, fault, vertex (line), seismic
section, cross-section, and deviated well data. You can sort seismic
data using other processes; the other types of data must be loaded or
captured in the proper format and their order not changed.

R2003.12.0

Process

203

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

If THINOPER is not defined, then the first elements of THINADDS,
THNRATES, and THNDISTS are used. If it is defined, then
THINOPER/THNTXTAS/THNTXTBS/THNVALAS/THNVALBS
are compared against the value of field LINIDFLD. If the comparison
passes, then the Nth THINADDS, THNRATES, and THNDISTS are
used on that line.
If the Nth element of THINOPER is a text field, then the Nth element
of THNTXTAS and (sometimes) the Nth element of THNTXTBS are
used. If the element of THINOPER is a numeric field, then the Nth
element of THNVALAS and (sometimes) the Nth element of
THNVALBS are used.
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

THINMODE C*20

Range Description and Default
Point selection mode.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE
ALL POINTS

= No thinning edit is performed.
= Retain point THINADDS plus every
THNRATESth point on the file.
Appropriate only for random data, i.e.,
well data or text files.
ENDPOINTS+RATE
= Retain endpoints plus every
THNRATESth point on each line,
beginning with point THINADDS.
Appropriate for line data.
ENDPOINTS+DIVISIBLE
= Retain endpoints plus every point for
which the shotpoint number plus
THINADDS is evenly divisible by
THNRATES on each line. Appropriate
for seismic data only.
ENDPOINTS+DISTANCE
= Retain only points that are at least
THINDIST units from the prior
retained point for each line.
Appropriate for line data only.

R2003.12.0

THINADDS

I

Array of up to 10 points that define which point after the
previous end point is the next starting point.
Default Value = 1

THNRATES

I

Array of up to 10 point retention frequencies. Defines
which point to retain after the starting point.
Default Value = 2

Process

204

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

THNDISTS

R

Array of up to 10 minimum distances between retained
points, in map units. Used only if THINMODE =
ENDPOINTS+DISTANCE.
Default Value = 0.0

THINOPER

C*12

Comparison operation. If defined, only those lines are
thinned for which the value of field LINIDFLD satisfies
the comparison. See “Valid Combinations” on page 194
for further details.
Default Value = None
Options:
EQ

= Keep values equal to THNTXTAS or
THNVALAS
NE
= Keep values not equal to THNTXTAS nor
THNVALAS
LT
= Keep values less than THNTXTAS or
THNVALAS
LE
= Keep values less than or equal to THNTXTAS
or THNVALAS
GT
= Keep values greater than THNTXTAS or
THNVALAS
GE
= Keep values greater than or equal to
THNTXTAS or THNVALAS
NULL = Keep values equal to the field’s null value
NOTNULL
= Keep values not equal to the field’s null
value
BETWEEN
= Keep values between the interval bounded
by THNTXTAS and THNTXTBS or
THNVALAS and THNVALBS
OUTSIDE
= Keep values outside the interval bounded
by THNTXTAS and THNTXTBS or
THNVALAS and THNVALBS

R2003.12.0

° THNTXTAS C*80

Array of up to 10 primary text masks for line or area
identification. Required for all THINOPER operations on
text fields except NULL and NOTNULL.

° THNTXTBS C*80

Array of up to 10 secondary text masks for line or area
identification, used with the text mask in the same
position in THNTXTAS. Each value must be greater than
the corresponding THNTXTAS value. Required if
RANGFLDS field is a text field and THINOPER =
BETWEEN or OUTSIDE.

° THNVALAS

Array of up to 10 primary numeric values for line or area
identification. Required for all THINOPER operations on
numeric fields except NULL and NOTNULL.

R

Process

205

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

° THNVALBS

R

DISCONTN

C*4

Range Description and Default
Array of up to 10 secondary numeric values for line or
area identification, used with the value in the same
position in THNVALAS. Each value must be greater than
the corresponding THNVALAS value. Required if
THINOPER = BETWEEN or OUTSIDE.
Use of discontinuity fields during the thinning process. If
these fields are used, then any point subjected to the
thinning algorithm that has any nonzero discontinuity
values passes the thinning criteria. Valid for line data, i.e.,
seismic, fault, vertex, contour, or deviated well data.
Default Value = NO
Options:
NO
YES

Parameters

= Do not use the discontinuity fields
= Use the discontinuity fields

for Range Editing — specifying a condition on a field
You can select records from a dataset based on the value of a field on
each record. SELECT can compare the value of a field to a constant
VALUE using the comparison operators as discussed in “Valid
Combinations” on page 194. For the EQ and NE operators operating
on character fields, VALUE can contain wildcard parameters.
If the Nth element of RNGOPERS is a text field, then the Nth element
of RNGTXTAS and (sometimes) the Nth element of RNGTXTBS is
used. If the element of RNGOPERS is a numeric field, then the Nth
element of RNGVALAS and (sometimes) the Nth element of
RNGVALBS is used.
If you specify multiple range edit specifiers, SELECT uses them in the
following manner:
1.

Range Edit conditions that are specified on a common field are
combined into one range edit condition using a logical OR
operation, i.e., a record that satisfies one of the range edit
conditions satisfies the entire condition for that field.

2.

Range Edit conditions for distinct fields are combined using a
logical AND operation, i.e., the fields of a record must satisfy all
of the range edit conditions to retain in the output dataset. Any
composite Range Edit condition effected by case 1 above is treated
as a single Range Edit condition if considered with those for other
fields.

For maximum performance, the most stringent range edit
specifications should be first.

R2003.12.0

Process

206

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• RANGFLDS

I

Array of 10 field number(s) in the input file FILEIN for
which the range edit is performed. Multiple operations on
the same field are allowed.

• RNGOPERS

C*12

Array of up to 10 comparison operations. Comparison is
performed on RANGFLDS field from the same array
position. See “Valid Combinations” on page 194 for
further details.
Options:
EQ

= Keep the values equal to RNGTXTAS or
RNGVALAS
NE
= Keep the values not equal to RNGTXTAS nor
RNGVALAS
LT
= Keep the values less than RNGTXTAS or
RNGVALAS
LE
= Keep the values less than or equal to
RNGTXTAS or RNGVALAS
GT
= Keep the values greater than RNGTXTAS or
RNGVALAS
GE
= Keep the values greater than or equal to
RNGTXTAS or RNGVALAS
BETWEEN = Keep the values between the interval
bounded by RNGTXTAS and
RNGTXTBS or RNGVALAS and
RNGVALBS
OUTSIDE
= Keep the values outside the interval
bounded by RNGTXTAS and
RNGTXTBS or RNGVALAS and
RNGVALBS
NULL
= Keep the values equal to the null values
of the field
NOTNULL = Keep the values not equal to the null
values of the field

R2003.12.0

° RNGTXTAS C*80

Array of up to 10 primary text masks for line
identification. Used with RNGOPERS comparison on
RANGFLDS field from the same array position. Required
for all RNGOPERS operations on text fields.

° RNGTXTBS C*80

Array of up to 10 secondary text masks for line
identification. Each value must be greater than the
corresponding RNGTXTAS value. Used with
RNGOPERS comparison on RANGFILDS field from the
same array position. Required if RANGFLDS field is a
text field and RNGOPERS = BETWEEN or OUTSIDE.

Process

207

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

° RNGVALAS

R

Array of up to 10 primary numeric values for line
identification. Used with RNGOPERS comparison from
the same array position. Required for all RNGOPERS
operations on numeric fields except NULL and
NOTNULL.

° RNGVALBS

R

Array of up to 10 secondary numeric values for line
identification. Each value must be greater than the
corresponding RNGVALAS value. Used with
RNGOPERS comparison from the same array position.
Required if RANGFLDS field is a numeric field and
RNGOPERS = BETWEEN or OUTSIDE.

Process

208

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Select Seismic Data To Post
Retrieve Seismic Data
The seismic data to post must be contained in an MFD and must
be of type DATA. The file specified by the user is opened.
Inspection of the field types in the file allows the process to
determine if the file is 2D seismic data or 3D seismic survey data.
If the data is not sorted correctly, the program issues a diagnostic
message and terminates. The valid sorts are shown in the
following table:
Data Type

2D
3D

Primary
Line Name
Line Number
3D Survey
3D Survey

Secondary
Shotpoint Number
Shotpoint Number
3D Line Number
3D Shotpoint Number

Tertiary
(none)
(none)
3D Shotpoint Number
3D Line Number

Select 2D Line(s)
If the user has specified POSTMODE = ALL, all 2D seismic
lines are sent through the posting process.
If the user has specified POSTMODE = SOME, the user must
specify at least one set of selection criteria (an operator and the
required masks). Each user-specified selection criteria is
compared to the specified Select Field. The Select Field must be
a Line Name or Line Number field. If a match is found, the data
is passed on to be posted, and the index of the matching selection
criteria is noted for future reference.
Select 3D Survey(s)
If the user has specified POSTMODE = ALL, all 3D seismic
surveys are sent through the posting process.
If the user has specified POSTMODE = SOME, the user must
specify at least one set of selection criteria (an operator and the
required masks). Each user-specified selection criteria is
compared to the specified Select Field. The Select Field must be
a 3D Survey Name field. If a match is found, the data is passed
on to be posted, and the index of the matching selection criteria is
noted for future reference.

R2003.12.0

Process

209

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Shaded Relief
Name

SHADED RELIEF

Alternate Name RELIEF SHADING
Function

This process creates a shaded relief grid. Once this grid is created, you
can run the contouring operation using the colorfill parameters and
display the picture.

Example

Azimuth of the sun:
Azimuth
0.0

Azimuth

Direction

North

180.0

South

45.0

Northeast

225.0

Southwest

90.0

East

270.0

West

Southeast

315.0

Northwest

135.0

Example

Direction

Conversion factor between vertical and horizontal units:
X & Y Units

Z Units

METER

METER

MILE

FOOT

Conversion
1.0
5280.0

If the units are not convertible, try to make the range in z about 1 ⁄ 3 of
the range in x and y. For example, if the range in x and y is about 1000
and the range in z is about 7, then (3*7)/1000 = 0.02 should be the
conversion factor.

R2003.12.0

Process

210

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

Range

Description and Default
Name of the input grid to shade.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0

GRIDOUT

C*24

Name of output grid.
Default Value = Calculated; based on GRIDIN

MFDOUT

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid.
Default Value = 1

MINBRITE

R

0.0–
1.0

Minimum brightness of a surface above the haze facing
away from the sun.
Default Value = 0.0

MAXBRITE

R

0.0–
1.0

Maximum brightness of a surface above the haze facing
toward the sun.
Default Value = 1.0

ALTSUN

R

0.0–
90.0

Altitude of the sun, in degrees, above the horizontal plane.
For maximum definition of detail, the sun’s rays should
be approximately parallel to the general trend of the
surface.
Default Value = 0.0002778

AZMSUN

R

0.0–
360.0

Azimuth of the sun, clockwise from the north, in degrees.
See “Example“ on page 210.
Default Value = 315.0

HAZEFACT

R

0.0–
1.0

Haze factor. Zero is no haze; one destroys all contrast at
the lowest grid level.
Default Value = 0.0

CONVFACT

R

Conversion factor between vertical and horizontal units.
See “Example“ on page 210.
Default Value = 1.0

Process

211

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Show Files
Name

SHOW FILES

Alternate Name LIST FILES
Function

This process lists all member files of a given type and/or file name
prefix for the MFDs currently attached. Output is to the system report
window by default; to change output, see REPTUNIT.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
FILETYPE

Data
Type

Range
C*4

Description and Default
Array of up to 10 types of files to list. See Appendix B.
File and Field Codes in the Z-MAP Plus Reference
manual for a complete list of Data File Type Codes.
Default Value = ALL
Options:

R2003.12.0

ALL

= All types.

GRID

= Grid files

DATA

= Data files

CNTR

= Contour files

FALT

= Fault files

VERT

= Vertex files

TEXT

= Text files

Process

212

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

PREFIX

C*24

List only files that have a name starting with this prefix.
Default Value = Blank, all file names

REPORT

C*8

Extent of the information to list.
Default Value = SUMMARY
Options:
SUMMARY
PARTIAL
FULL

REPTUNIT

R2003.12.0

I

0, 60

= List of the file name, file type and
size.
= List the file name, file type, size, and
file header.
= List the file name, file type, size,
header and field descriptions.

FORTRAN logical unit to which the listing is written.
Note: Zero causes the listing to be written to the screen
(in interactive executions). Any other value causes
the list to print to the run log file (in batch
executions).
Default Value = 0

Process

213

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Single Data Ops
Name

SINGLE DATA OPS

Alternate Name DATA TO DATA
Function

This process performs operations involving a single input field of a
control point file. Each use of this process creates a new data file. This
file contains all the fields and records of the input (old) data file, plus
the newly calculated field. The new field either replaces an existing
field or is added as a new field.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

INFLD

I

Range

Description and Default
Name of the input data file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0
Field number of the input field. This field must not be a
character field.
Default Value = First Z Value field
or
First numeric field, if no Z Value field is
available

Process

214

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
• OPNAME

Data
Type
C*8

Range

Description and Default
Name of data operation to perform.
Options:
SCALE
BIAS
SQUARE
POWER

=
=
=
=

Multiply each field value by PARAM.
Add PARAM to each field value.
Square each field value (second power).
Raise each field value to the PARAMth

SQROOT
ROOT

EXP
LN

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

SIN

=

COS

=

TAN

=

ATAN

=

NORM

=

LOG10

=

Take the square root of each field value.
Take the PARAMth root of each field
value.
Take the absolute value of each field
value.
Perform natural exponentiation.
Take the natural logarithm of each field
value.
Take the sine of each field value; values in
radians.
Take the cosine of each field value; values
in radians.
Take the tangent of each field value;
values in radians.
Take the arctangent of each field value;
values in radians.
Normalize the field by its mean and
standard deviation.
Take the common logarithm of each field
value.

power.

ABS

R2003.12.0

Process

215

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
• OPNAME
(cont’d)

Data
Type
C*8

Range

Description and Default
Options: (cont’d)
NORMMAX

NORMSIG
CLIPMAX
CLIPMIN
BLANKMAX
BLANKMIN
RECIPRCL
REPLZNON
REDFZNON
ROUND
FLOOR

CEIL

FIX

OUTFLD

R2003.12.0

I

= Normalize each field value by the
maximum value in the field, so that
the maximum value in the output
field is 1 (one).
= Normalize the field by its standard
deviation.
= Replace values greater than
PARAM with PARAM.
= Replace field values less than
PARAM with PARAM.
= Replace field values greater than
PARAM with ZNON.
= Replace field values less than
PARAM with ZNON.
= Take reciprocals of field values.
= Replace the null field values with
parameter ZNON.
= Redefine the field’s null value with
parameter ZNON.
= Round each field value to the
nearest PARAM.
= Round the field value to the largest
integer that is less than or equal to
the field value.
= Round the field value to the
smallest integer that is greater than
or equal to the field value.
= Truncate each field value by
changing the value to the right of
the decimal point to 0.

Field number of the output field.
If N denotes the number of fields on the input control
point file, then legitimate values for the output field
would be from 0 to N+1 but not N+2.
A value of 0 or N+1 means that a new field is created; a
value from 1 to N means that the corresponding field on
the input control point file is replaced by this output field.
Note: You cannot replace a character field; you must
create a new one.
Default Value = 0, create a new field

Process

216

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

FLDNAME

C*20

Name for the output field.
Default Value = Old field name, if this z field is to replace
an existing field in the input file
or
Based on the field type of the new field, if the
output field is a new field

DATAOUT

C*24

Name of the output data file.

MFDOUT

I

ZNON

R

° PARAM

R

Range

0–5

Description and Default

Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.
Default Value = 1
Null data value for the output control point file.
Default Value = ZNON of input data file
Constant to use with an operation. Required if one of the
following operations (OPNAME) is specified
If the OPNAME is:

PARAM is:

SCALE

Multiplication factor

BIAS

Bias for addition

POWER

Value of exponent

ROOT

Value of N for Nth root

CLIPMAX

Upper threshold

CLIPMIN

Lower threshold

BLANKMAX

Upper threshold

BLANKMIN

Lower threshold

ROUND

Round off unit

Process

217

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Single Grid Ops
Name

SINGLE GRID OPS

Alternate Name GRID TO GRID
Function

This process performs operations involving a single input grid,
creating a new output grid.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

• OPNAME

C*8

Range

Description and Default
Name of the input grid file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of data operation to perform.
Options:
SCALE
BIAS
SQUARE
POWER
SQROOT
ROOT
ABS
EXP
LN
LOG10
SIN
COS
TAN
ATAN

R2003.12.0

= Multiply each grid node value by
PARAM
= Add PARAM to each grid node value
= Square each grid node value
(second power)
= Raise each grid node value to the
PARAMth power
= Take the square root of each grid node
value
= Take the PARAMth root of each grid
node value
= Take the absolute value of each grid node
value
= Perform natural exponentiation on each
grid node value
= Take the natural logarithm of each grid
node value
= Take the common logarithm of each
grid node value
= Take the sine of each grid node value;
values in radians
= Take the cosine of each grid node value;
values in radians
= Take the tangent of each grid node value;
values in radians
= Take the arctangent of each grid value;
values in radians

Process

218

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
• OPNAME
(cont’d)

Data
Type

Range

C*8

Description and Default
Name of grid operation to perform.
Options: (cont’d)
SUBMEAN
RECIPRCL
NORMMAX
NORMSIG
NORM
CLIPMAX
CLIPMIN
BLANKMIN
BLANKMAX
DX2
DY2
DIPMAG
DIPAZM
REPLZNON
REDFZNON

R2003.12.0

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

= Subtract the mean from each grid
node value
= Take reciprocals of each grid node
value
= Normalize th grid by its maximum
value.
= Normalize the grid by its standard
deviation.
= Normalize the grid by its mean and
standard deviation
= Replace values greater than PARAM
with PARAM
= Replace values greater than PARAM
with PARAM
= Replace each grid node value greater
than PARAM with ZNON.
= Replace each grid node value less
than PARAM with ZNON.
= Second derivative in x direction
= Second derivative in y direction
= Dip magnitude is the tangent of
the dip angle
= Dip azimuth angle is the direction of
dip measured from north clockwise
= Replace all grid ZNONs with
PARAM
= Redefine the grid’s null value with
parameter ZNON

Name of the output grid file.
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1

Process

219

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

° PARAM

ZNON

FAULTS
MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

R

Constant to use with an operation. Required if one of the
following operations (OPNAME) is specified:

R

If the OPNAME is:

The PARAM is:

SCALE

Mulitplication factor

BIAS

Bias for addition

POWER

Value of exponent

ROOT

Value of N for Nth root

CLIPMAX

Upper threshold

CLIPMIN

Lower threshold

BLANKMAX

Upper threshold

BLANKMIN

Lower threshold

REPLZNON

z Value to replace grid ZNON
values

Null data value for the output grid.
Default Value = ZNON of input grid if OPNAME =
REDFZNON
or
1.0E30, otherwise

C*24
I

Description and Default

Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0

Process

220

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Sort
Name

SORT

Alternate Name
Function

This process sorts data in ascending and descending order, and
eliminates duplicate records. Up to ten sort fields can be specified; the
first field in the SORTFLDS array is the Primary Sort Field and any
other fields specified are Secondary Sort Fields. Data is sorted in
ascending or descending order with respect to the Primary Sort Field.
If the primary sort fields of two records have the same value, then
secondary sort fields are compared in the order specified until an
inequality is found. If two or more records have the same sort field
values, they are adjacent on the output file.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

SORTFLDS

I

NFIELDS

I

DATAOUT
MFDOUT
SRTORDRS

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

Name of the input data file.
0–5

C*12

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 10 field numbers of the fields to use for
sorting. These are the sort key fields.
Default Value = 1

1–10

C*24
I

Description and Default

Number of fields to sort.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output data file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.
Default Value = 1
Array of up to 10 entries specifying sorting order, in the
same position as the corresponding entry in SORTFLDS.
An entry of ASCENDING in the Nth position indicates
that the Nth SORTFLDS entry is sorted in ascending
order. If multiple fields are used (e.g., SORTLFDS =
1,2,3), then a combination of sort orders are allowed.
Default Value = ASCENDING
Options:
ASCENDING
DESCENDING

Process

221

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DUPRECRD C*12

Range

Description and Default
Method of handling duplicate records.
Default Value = STANDARD
Options:
STANDARD

= Allow sorted records to be written
regardless of duplicate field values.

= Check adjacent records for identical
field values in SORTFLDS fields;
eliminate the latter record.
NODUPVALU = Check adjacent records for identical
field values in all the fields;
eliminate the latter record.
NODUPKEYS

ORDREC

C*12

Method for handling record order.
Default Value = NOTEQUAL
Options:
= Records with identical sort key field
values retain their relative position
or order in the sorted output file.
NOTEQUAL = Check with identical sort key field
values do not retain their relative
position or order in the sorted output
file.
EQUAL

R2003.12.0

Process

222

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Spawn
Name

SPAWN

Alternate Name
Function

Parameters
Parameter
Name

This process initiates operating system commands from a ZCL run
during the execution phase (not the syntax checking phase) so that you
can execute operating system commands. This process is only effective
if the ZCL run is being executed interactively, while you are watching
it go by on the screen. To resume the ZCL run, use the normal logout
procedure for your computer.
Data
Type

COMMAND C*80

Range

Description and Default
System command.
For VAX/VMS systems, the value is a command such as
DIR, SET DEFAULT, RUN, etc.
For Unix systems, the value is a string that is interpreted
as if it had been typed as a command at the Unix prompt.

Parameters for VAX/VMS systems

R2003.12.0

FILEIN

C*80

Name of the input disk file that contains VAX/VMS
commands, one command per line. If blank, the
commands are taken from the terminal.

FILEOUT

C*80

Name of the output disk file to contain the VAX/VMS
output. If blank, output is directed to terminal.

RESUME

C*8

Whether the calling process continues executing in
parallel with the spawned subprocess.
Default Value = WAIT
Options:
= Calling process hibernates until
WAIT
subprocess completes.
=
Calling process continues to
NOWAIT
execute in parallel with the
subprocess.

Process

223

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

SYMBOLS

C*12

Passing of currently defined VAX symbols to the
spawned subprocess.
Default Value = PASSED
Options:
= Subprocess inherits all currently
PASSED
defined symbols.
=
Subprocess does not inherit
NOT
symbols.
PASSED

LOGICALS

C*12

Passing of VAX logical names to the spawned
subprocess.
Default Value = PASSED
Options:
PASSED
NOT
PASSED

R2003.12.0

= Subprocess inherits all currently
defined process logical names.
= Subprocess does not inherit logical
names.

NOTIFY

C*12

Broadcasting of a message to standard output if the
spawned subprocess completes or aborts.
Default Value = NO MESSAGE
Options:
MESSAGES
NO MESSAGES

KEYPAD

C*12

Passing of keypad symbols and state to the spawned
subprocess.
Default Value = PASSED
Options:
PASSED
NOT PASSED

PROCNAME C*15

Process name for spawned subprocess. Only unique
process names are allowed.
Default Value = ZCL_SPAWNED_UseNumber

PROMPT

Interactive system prompt to use for new subprocess.
Default Value = VAX

C*32

Process

224

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Squash MFD
Name

SQUASH MFD

Alternate Name COMPRESS MFD
Function

This process copies all member files not marked for deletion (by
DELETE FILE Process) from an old MFD to another MFD.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• MFDIN
MFDOUT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to copy member files from.

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to copy member files into.
Default Value = 1

Process

225

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Squash ZGF
Name

SQUASH ZGF

Alternate Name COMPRESS ZGF
Function

This process copies all pictures not marked for deletion (by DELETE
PICTURE Process) from an old graphics file to another graphics file.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

• ZGFIN

C*80

Name of the graphics file to copy pictures from.

• ZGFOUT

C*80

Name of the graphics file to copy pictures into.

Process

226

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Stop
Name

STOP

Alternate Name
Function

This process is used to end a ZCL job stream. There must be one for
every ZCL job stream.

Example

STOP:nn,mm

/

where nn is the use number and mm is the back reference number.
Parameters

R2003.12.0

No Parameters

Process

227

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Surface Intersect
Name

SURFACE INTERSECT

Alternate Name INTERSECT SURFS
Function

This process takes two grids as input and produces a vertex file that
represents the line of intersection.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

• GRIDIN1

C*24

MFDIN1

I

• GRIDIN2

C*24

MFDIN2

I

VERTICES

C*24

MFDOUT

I

Range

Description and Default
Name of the first input grid file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the first input grid file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the second input grid file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the second input grid
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output vertex file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output vertex file.
Default Value = 1

Process

228

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Surfaces Diagram
Name

SURFACES DIAGRAM

Alternate Name Z3D
Function

This process draws a Z-3D Surfaces diagram for up to 10 surfaces,
with or without faults.
If two or more surfaces are linked, the following parameters are
likewise linked:





z minimum and z maximum mapped into the box allocation
lower boundary of the box allocation
z scale
axis labeling parameters
box color index

This process supports two different methods of defining arrays, either
of which can be used for any array. In the first method, the array
elements are listed as part of the process command. For example,
FLTXFLD = 1,2,1 defines the first three elements in the fault X field
number array. In the second method, the array is stored in a Data Block
and referenced by the Data Block’s use number. For example,
DBFLTXFLD = 40 causes the fault X field numbers to be extracted
from DATA BLOCK 40, starting from the beginning of the Data
Block. All parameters referencing Data Block arrays have names with
the prefix DB. If a Data Block value is left empty the defaults are blank
for data type TEXT, and 0 for data type REAL or INTEGER.
If specifying these parameters for linked grids, in either a Data Block
or array, all values should be the same.
Notes

R2003.12.0

The PICTURE Process must be used to create or open a graphics file
and picture before this process is used.

Process

229

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Example
DATA BLOCK: 40,00 HOWMANY = 3, DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’, DATASIZE = 1,
VALUE = 1, 2, 1 /
SURFACES DIAGRAM: 10,00 GRIDIN = ’BOTTOM GRID’, ’TOP GRID’, ’FLAT
GRID’,
FAULTS = ’BOTTOM GRID FAULTS’,
DBFLTXFLD = 40,
GRDLINK = ’FLAT GRID’, ’FLAT GRID’,
AZIMUTH = 225.0, ELEVANGL = 15.0,
TOPCLR = 5, 4, 3, WTRCCLR = 4,
MESTOP = ’MESH’, ’MESH’, ’PERI’,
MESBOT = ’MESH’, ’MESH’, ’PERI’,
SKIRT = ’YES’, BOX = ’NO’,
BASEMAP = ’BASEMAP.BDF’,
BDFGRD = ’FLAT GRID’,
LGB1S = 3, 5, 6, 9, 12, 16,
LABELS = ’YES’, ’YES’, ’YES’,
WELLFILE = ’DEV WELLS’,
TRACEGRD = ’FLAT GRID’,
LEGEND = ’UPPER LEFT’ /

Parameters
Parameter
Name

° DBGRIDS

for input file
Data
Type
I

Range

Description and Default
Use number of the Data Block that contains the name of
up to 10 grids to display. Required if GRIDIN is not
specified.
The order of the grids in the Data Block indicates the
order of the surfaces in the box. The first is the lowest in
the box, the second is the next one up, etc. Grids that are
linked together are grouped together in the box and
ordered by their z values from lowest to highest.
The Data Block that contains the grids to display should have
the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’TEXT’
DATASIZE = 24

DBMFDGRD

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the grid MFD
numbers.
The Data Block that contains the MFD numbers for the grids
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
0–5

R2003.12.0

Process

230

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

° GRIDIN

Data
Type

Range

C*24

MFDGRD

I

DBGRDLNK

I

Description and Default
Array of up to 10 names of the grids to display. Required
if DBGRIDS is not specified.
The order of the grids in the array indicates the order of
the surfaces in the box. The first is the lowest in the box,
the second is the next one up, etc. Grids that are linked
together are grouped together in the box and ordered by
their z values from lowest to highest.

0–5

Array of up to 10 numbers of MFDs that contains the
input grids, in the same position as the corresponding grid
in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 0
Use number of the Data Block that contains the link grid
names.
For example, if grids 1, 2, and 3 are link, the name of the
1st grid is placed in the 2nd and 3rd array positions of the
Data Block. Grids that are linked together are grouped
together in the box and ordered by their z values from
lowest to highest.
The Data Block that contains the link grid names should have
the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’TEXT’
DATASIZE = 24

GRDLINK

DBFAULTS

C*24

Array of up to 10 names of the grids to link.
For example, if grids 1, 2, and 3 are linked, the name of
the 1st grid is placed in the 2nd and 3rd array positions of
GRDLINK. Grids that are linked together are grouped
together in the box and ordered by their z values from
lowest to highest.

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the names of
the fault file for each grid, in the same position as the
corresponding grid listed in GRIDIN or DBGRIDS.
If a fault file is not required for one of the grids then its
position is left blank and a comma is used to hold that
position. If the same fault file is used for all grids, its
name must be entered once for each grid.
The Data Block that contains the names of the fault file for
each grid should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’TEXT’
DATASIZE = 24

R2003.12.0

Process

231

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
DBMFDFLT

Data
Type

Range

I

Description and Default
Use number of the Data Block that contains the MFD
numbers for the fault files, in the same position as the
corresponding fault file listed in DBFAULTS.
The Data Block that contains the MFD numbers of the fault
files should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
0–5

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFLT

I

DBFLTXFD

I

Array of up to 10 names of fault files for the grid in
GRIDIN or DBGRIDS, in the same position as the
corresponding grid.
If a fault file is not required for one of the grids then its
position is left blank and a comma is used to hold that
position. If the same fault file is used for all grids, its
name must be entered once for each grid.
Default Value = Blank
0–5

Array of up to 10 numbers of the MFDs that contains the
input fault files, in the same position as the corresponding
fault file as listed in FAULTS.
Default Value = 0
Use number of the Data Block that contains the field
numbers of the X field in the fault files, in the same
position as the corresponding fault file as listed in
DBFAULTS.
The Data Block that contains the fault X field numbers should
have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
≥0

R2003.12.0

Process

232

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
DBFLTYFD

Data
Type
I

Range

Description and Default
Use number of the Data Block that contains the field
numbers of the Y field in the fault files, in the same
position as the corresponding fault file as listed in
DBFAULTS.
The Data Block that contains the fault Y field numbers should
have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
≥0

DBFLTZFD

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the field
numbers of the z field in the fault files, in the same
position as the corresponding fault file as listed in
DBFAULTS.
The Data Block that contains the fault Z field numbers should
have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
≥0

DBFLTIFD

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the field
numbers of the Segment ID field in the fault files, in the
same position as the corresponding fault file as listed in
DBFAULTS.
The Data Block that contains the fault Segment ID numbers
for the grids should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
≥0

FLTXFLD

R2003.12.0

I

Array of up to 10 field numbers of the X field in the fault
files, in the same position as the corresponding fault file
as listed in FAULTS.
Default Value = First X field

Process

233

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

FLTYFLD

I

Array of up to 10 field numbers of the Y field in the fault
files, in the same position as the corresponding fault file
as listed in FAULTS.
Default Value = First Y field

FLTZFLD

I

Array of up to 10 field numbers of the Z Value field in the
fault files, in the same position as the corresponding fault
file as listed in FAULTS.
Default Value = First Z Value field

FLTIFLD

I

Array of up to 10 field numbers of the Segment ID field in
the fault files, in the same position as the corresponding
fault file as listed in FAULTS.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

Parameters for box orientation and dimensions
AZIMUTH

R

ELEVANGL

R

0.0–
360.0

Angle measured clockwise from north of the viewing
position, in degrees. The default viewpoint (i.e., the point
in the box on which the view is centered) is the center of
the box.
Default Value = 180.0

–90.0

Angle above the horizontal of the viewing position, in

through degrees.

90.0

R2003.12.0

Default Value = 30.0

RANGE

R

>0.0– Relative distance of the viewing position away from the
9999.0 center of the box.
Default Value = 1.75

XSCALE

R

>0.0

Scale of the x axis for all grids.
Default Value = Based upon grid x range

YSCALE

R

>0.0

Scale of the y axis for all grids.
Default Value = Based upon grid y range

BZMIN

R

Minimum z coordinate of the box in box coordinates.
Default Value = Minimum box coordinate of all grids

BZMAX

R

Maximum z coordinate of the box in box coordinates.
Default Value = Maximum box coordinate of all grids

Process

234

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DBWZMIN

I

Range

Description and Default
Use number of the Data Block that contains the world
coordinate z values at the base of each grid’s box
allocation, in the same position as the corresponding grid
as listed in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s base z value should
have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’REAL’
DATASIZE = 1

DBWZMAX

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the world
coordinate z values at the top of each grid’s box
allocation, in the same position as the corresponding grid
as listed in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s top z value should
have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’REAL’
DATASIZE = 1

R2003.12.0

WZMIN

R

Array of up to 10 world coordinates of the base of each
grid’s box allocation, in the same position as the
corresponding grid as listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = MIN (z grid value for grid or group of
linked grids including ZNON replacement
value) plus a spacing buffer, based on the total z
range of all grids

WZMAX

R

Array of up to 10 world coordinates of the top of each
grid’s box allocation, in the same position as the
corresponding grid as listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = MAX (z grid value for grid or group of
linked grids including ZNON replacement
value) plus a spacing buffer, based on the total z
range of all grids

Process

235

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
DBBGZMIN

Data
Type
I

Range

Description and Default
Use number of the Data Block that contains the box
coordinate of the base of each grid’s box allocation, in the
same position as the corresponding grid as listed in
DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s base box coordinate
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’REAL’
DATASIZE = 1

DBZSCALE

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the z scale for
each grid, in the same position as the corresponding grid
as listed in DBGRIDS.
If the z scale for a grid is set to zero, then the box
allocation for the grid has a height of zero, effectively
flattening the grid.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s z scale should have
the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’REAL’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
>0

DBZNNRPL

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the ZNON
replacement value for each grid, in the same position as
the corresponding grid as listed in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s ZNON replacement
value should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’REAL’
DATASIZE = 1

BGZMIN

R2003.12.0

R

Array of up to 10 box coordinates of the base of each
grid’s box allocation, in the same position as the
corresponding grid as listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 0.0

Process

236

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range
≥0

Description and Default

ZSCALE

R

Array of up to 10 z scales, in the same position as the
corresponding grid as listed in GRIDIN.
If the z scale for a grid is set to zero, then the box
allocation for the grid has a height of zero, effectively
flattening the grid.
Default Value = Based upon z range of all grids

ZNNRPL

R

Array of up to 10 ZNON replacement values, in the same
position as the corresponding grid as listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = Grid z minimum value

VIEWFACT

R

>0.0– Relative size of the diagram. This is the length of the
1.0
longest axis of the box in units of RANGE. Increasing or
decreasing VIEWFACT changes the overall size of the
diagram without changing its perspective view.
Default Value = 0.60

Parameters for colors
DBBOXCLR

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the color
index to use to draw the enclosing box for each grid, in
the same position as the corresponding grid as listed in
DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s box color index
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
0–255

DPTOPCLR

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the color
index to use to draw the top of each grid mesh, in the
same position as the corresponding grid as listed in
DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s top mesh color index
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
0–255

R2003.12.0

Process

237

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
DBBOTCLR

Data
Type
I

Range

Description and Default
Use number of the Data Block that contains the color
index to use to draw the bottom of each grid mesh, in the
same position as the corresponding grid as listed in
DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s bottom mesh color
index should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
0–255

DBZNNCLR

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the color
index to use to draw the ZNON area(s) of each grid, in the
same position as the corresponding grid in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s ZNON color index
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
0–255

DBFLTCLR

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the color
index to use to draw the fault traces of each grid, in the
same position as the corresponding grid in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s fault trace color index
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’INTEGER’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
0–255

BOXCLR

R2003.12.0

I

0–255 Array of up to 10 color indices for the enclosing box for
each grid, in the same position as the corresponding grid
as listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 1

Process

238

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

TOPCLR

I

0–255 Array of up to 10 color indices for the top of each grid
mesh, in the same position as the corresponding grid as
listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 1

BOTCLR

I

ZNNCLR

I

0–255 Array of up to 10 color indices for the bottom of each grid
mesh, in the same position as the corresponding grid as
listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 3
0–255 Array of up to 10 color indices for the ZNON area(s) of
each grid, in the same position as the corresponding grid
as listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 4

FLTCLR

I

0–255 Array of up to 10 color indices for the fault traces for each
grid, in the same position as the corresponding grid as
listed in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 2

SKTTCLR

I

0–255 Color index for the exterior of the skirt below the bottom
surface.
Default Value = 1

SKTBCLR

I

0–255 Color index for the interior of the skirt below the bottom
surface.
Default Value = 3

WTRCCLR

I

0–255 Color index for well traces.
Default Value = 5

Parameters for drawing
DBMESTOP

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the draw
option for each grid’s top, in the same position as the
corresponding grid as listed in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s top drcd TESTaw
option should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’TEXT’
DATASIZE = 12
Options for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
MESH
= Draw grid mesh
PERIMETER = Draw only grid perimeter

R2003.12.0

Process

239

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
DBMESBOT

Data
Type
I

Range

Description and Default
Use number of the Data Block that contains the draw
option for each grid’s bottom, in the same position as the
corresponding grid as listed in DBGRIDS.
The Data Block that contains the grid’s bottom draw option
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’TEXT’
DATASIZE = 12
Options for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
MESH
= Draw grid mesh
PERIMETER = Draw only grid perimeter

MESTOP

C*12

Array of up to 10 options for drawing the top of each grid,
in the same position as the corresponding grid listed in
GRIDIN.
Default Value = MESH
Options:
= Draw a grid mesh
MESH
PERIMETER

MESBOT

C*12

Array of up to 10 options for drawing the bottom of each
grid, in the same position as the corresponding grid listed
in GRIDIN.
Default Value = MESH
Options:
= Draw a grid mesh
MESH
PERIMETER

R2003.12.0

= Draw only grid perimeters

= Draw only grid perimeters

TRIANGLE

C*4

Triangulation of unfaulted surfaces. All faulted surfaces
are automatically triangulated.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES
NO

SKIRT

C*4

Drawing of a skirt below the bottom surface.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES
NO

Process

240

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

HIDNLINE

C*4

Performance of hidden line removal.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO

BOX

C*4

Drawing of enclosing box.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO

ARROW

C*4

Drawing of North arrow on the top of the box. The value
of ARROW is ignored unless BOX = YES.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES
NO
Parameters for Basemap Detail
DBBMAPS

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the names of
the Basemap Detail files from which features are selected
for drawing.
The Data Block that contains the Basemap Detail file names
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of Basemap Detail files
DATATYPE = ’TEXT’
DATASIZE = 80

° DBBDFGRD

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the names of
the grid on which each basemap is draped, in the same
position as the corresponding Basemap Detail file listed
in DBBMAPS. Required if more than one grid is in the
surface diagram and DBBMAPS is specified.
The Data Block that contains the names of the grids on which
to drape Basemap Detail should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of Basemap Detail files
DATATYPE = ’TEXT’
DATASIZE = 24

R2003.12.0

Process

241

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
DBBDFDRW

Data
Type
I

Range

Description and Default
Use number of the Data Block specifying where on the
surfaces the basemap detail is drawn, in the same position
as the corresponding Basemap Detail file listed in
DBBMAPS.
The Data Block specifying where the basemap detail is to
be drawn on each grid should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’TEXT’
DATASIZE = 8
Options for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
TOP
= Draw on top only
BOTTOM = Draw on bottom only
BOTH
= Draw on both top and bottom

DBLGBS

I

Array of up to 10 use numbers of the Data Blocks that
contain the graphics features to draw from each Basemap
Detail file, in the same position as the corresponding file
listed in GRIDIN
The Data Block that contains the graphics features for each
Basemap Detail file should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number graphics features to
draw

DATATYPE = ’Integer’
DATASIZE = 1
Range options for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
1–1000
= Draw that feature
0
= Ignore
<0
= Draw all features

BASEMAP

° BDFGRD

R2003.12.0

C*80

Array of up to 10 names of Basemap Detail files from
which graphics features are selected for drawing, in the
same position as the corresponding grid in GRIDIN.

C*80

Array of up to 10 names of grids on which Basemap
Detail is draped, in the same position as the corresponding
Basemap Detail file as listed in BASEMAP. Required if
more than one grid is in the surfaces diagram and
BASEMAP is specified.

Process

242

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

BDFDRW

C*8

LGBS1S

I

Range

Description and Default
Array of up to 10 options specifying on which grid mesh
the basemap detail is drawn.
Default Value = BOTH
Options:
= Draw on top only
TOP
BOTTOM

= Draw at bottom only

BOTH

= Draws on top and bottom

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the
first Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options:
1–1000
0
<0

R2003.12.0

= Draw that feature
= Ignore
= Draw all features

LGBS2S

I

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the
second Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options: same as LGBS1S

LGBS3S

I

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the
third Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options: same as LGBS1S

LGBS4S

I

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the
fourth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options: same as LGBS1S

LGBS5S

I

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the
fifth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options: same as LGBS1S

LGBS6S

I

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the
sixth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options: same as LGBS1S

Process

243

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

LGBS7S

I

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the
seventh Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options: same as LGBS1S

LGBS8S

I

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the
eighth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options: same as LGBS1S

LGBS9S

I

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the
ninth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options: same as LGBS1S

LGBS10S

I

Array of up to 40 graphics feature codes to draw from the
tenth Basemap Detail file specified by BASEMAP.
Default Value = 0, draw all features
Range Options: same as LGBS1S

Parameters for axis labeling
DBLABELS

I

C*4

Array of up to 10 entries specifying whether the x, y, and z
axis of the box are labeled. The value of DBLABELS is
ignored if BOX = NO.
Note: The x and y axis labels are drawn only if the z axis
of one or more of the grids is labeled.
The Data Block that contains the axis label option should
have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’TEXT’
DATASIZE = 4
Options for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
YES
= Label axes
NO
= No axes labeled

R2003.12.0

Process

244

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

LABELS

C*4

Array of up to 10 entries specifying whether the x, y, and z
axis of the box are labeled. The value of LABELS is
ignored if BOX = NO.
Note: The x and y axis labels are drawn only if the z axis
of one or more of the grids is labeled.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES
NO

XMINLABL

R

Minimum value to label on x axis.
Default Value = Based upon the x limits of the grids
Range Options:
≥ minimum x of grids through ≤ maximum x of grids

XMAXLABL

R

Maximum value to label on x axis.
Default Value = Based upon the x limits of the grids
Range Options:
≥ XMINLABL through ≤ maximum x of grids

XSIZLABL

R

> 0.0

Size of x axis labels in terms of x engineering coordinates.
Default Value = (WXMAX – WXMIN) / 50.0

XINCLABL

R

> 0.0

Labeling increment for x axis.
Default Value = Based upon the x limits of the grids

XDECIMAL

I

0–8

Number of decimal places in the posted x axis labels.
Default Value = Based upon the x limits of the grids

YMINLABL

R

Minimum value to label on the y axis.
Default Value = Based upon the y limits of the grids
Range Options:
≥ minimum y of grids through ≤ maximum y of grids

YMAXLABL

R

Maximum value to label on the y axis.
Default Value = Based upon the y limits of the grids
Range Options:
≥ YMINLABL through ≤ maximum y of grids

YSIZLABL

R

> 0.0

Description and Default

Size of y axis labels expressed in terms of x engineering
coordinates.
Default Value = (WXMAX – WXMIN) / 50.0

Process

245

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

YINCLABL

R

> 0.0

The y axis labeling increment.
Default Value = Based upon the y limits of the grids

YDECIMAL

I

0–8

Number of decimal places in the posted y axis labels.
Default Value = Based upon the y limits of the grid

DBZMINLB

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the minimum
value to label on the z axis.
The Data Block that contains the minimum z axis label
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’REAL’
DATASIZE = 1

DBZMAXLB

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the maximum
value to label on the z axis.
The Data Block that contains the maximum z axis label
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’REAL’
DATASIZE = 1

DBZINCLB

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the z axis
labeling increment.
The Data Block that contains the z axis labeling increment
should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’REAL’
DATASIZE = 1

DBZSIZLB

I

Use number of the Data Block that contains the size of z
axis labels in terms of x engineering coordinates.
The Data Block that contains the size of z axis labels should
have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’REAL’
DATASIZE = 1

R2003.12.0

Process

246

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
DBZDECML

Data
Type

Range

I

Description and Default
Use number of the Data Block that contains the number of
decimal places in the posted z axis labels.
The Data Block that contains the number of decimal places
for z axis labels should have the following structure:
HOWMANY = Number of grids
DATATYPE = ’REAL’
DATASIZE = 1
Range for each element of VALUE in the Data Block:
0–8

R2003.12.0

ZMINLABL

R

Array of up to 10 minimum values to label on the z axis,
in the same position as the corresponding grid in
GRIDIN.
Default Value = Based upon the z limits mapped into the
box allocation for the grid
Range Options:
≥ minimum z of allocated region through
≤ maximum z of allocated region

ZMAXLABL

R

Array of up to 10 maximum values to label on the z axis,
in the same position as the corresponding grid in
GRIDIN.
Default Value = Based upon the z limits mapped into the
box allocation for the grid
Range Options:
≥ ZMINLABL through
≤ maximum z of allocated region

ZINCLABL

R

>0

Array of up to 10 increments for z axis labels, in the same
position as the corresponding value in ZMINLABL.
Default Value = Based upon the z limits mapped into the
box allocation for the grid

ZSIZLABL

R

>0

Array of up to 10 sizes of z axis labels expressed in terms
of x engineering coordinates, in the same position as the
corresponding value in ZMINLABL.
Default Value = (WXMAX – WXMIN) / 50.0

ZDECIMAL

I

0–8

Array of up to 10 numbers of decimal places in the posted
z axis labels, in the same position as the corresponding
value in ZMINLABL.
Default Value = Based upon the z limits mapped into the
box allocation for the grid

Process

247

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

Parameters for well traces
WELLFILE

C*24

MFDWELL

I

° TRACEGRD C*24

Name of the deviated well file.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the deviated well file.
Name of the grid with which the well traces are
associated. Required if WELLFILE is specified and more
than one grid is in the surfaces diagram.

Parameters for legend
LEGEND

C*12

Location of legend.
Default Value = OMIT
Options:
= Specify upper left corner and lower
USER
right corner coordinates of a
legend
=
Draw no legend.
OMIT
UPPER LEFT

= Locate legend in upper left margin

LOWER LEFT = Locate legend in lower left
margin.
=
Locate legend in upper right
UPPER RIGHT
margin.
=
Locate legend in lower right
LOWER
margin.
RIGHT

R2003.12.0

° XUPPLEFT

R

The x coordinate of upper left corner of legend, in plotter
units (in or cm). Required if LEGEND = USER.

° YUPPLEFT

R

The y coordinate of upper left corner of legend, in plotter
units (in or cm). Required if LEGEND = USER.

° XLOWRGHT

R

The x coordinate of lower right corner of legend, in plotter
units (in or cm). Required if LEGEND = USER.

° YLOWRGHT

R

The y coordinate of lower right corner of legend, in plotter
units (in or cm). Required if LEGEND = USER.

Process

248

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Syntax Only
Name

SYNTAX ONLY

Alternate Name SYNTAX
Function

This process instructs ZCL to only check for syntactical errors during
the initial scan of the ZCL command stream. It does not check
parameter values, file existence or file type. It does check parameter
and process name spelling, process terminator, commas, and whether
parameter values are of the correct type (R, I, D or C).
If this process occurs in a command stream, then no part of that stream
executes. The primary use for this process is for syntactical debugging
if the files needed as input for a command stream do not yet exist.

R2003.12.0

Example

SYNTAX ONLY:

Parameters

No Parameters

/

Process

249

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

System Parms
Name

SYSTEM PARMS

Alternate Name
Function

Flags or switches that affect the mode of operation of ZCL are set by
this process. The UNITS flag switches between an English units
environment (inches) and a metric units environment (centimeters) for
picture and plotted features set up.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

UNITS

C*8

Range Description and Default
Type of units for picture and plot environments.
Subsequent defaults and ranges are calculated according
to this setting.
Default Value = ENGLISH
Options:
ENGLISH = Sets units to inches
METRICS = Sets units to centimeters

Process

250

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Text
Name

TEXT

Alternate Name TXT
Function

This process posts text data from the parameter TEXT onto the current
picture.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to open a graphics file and picture
before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• TEXT

C*80

Range

Description and Default
Text string to post.

X

R

The x location of text, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm

Y

R

The y location of text, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm

FONT

COLOR

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*8

I

Type font to use. See Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and
Line Patterns in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual for
examples of font types.
Default Value = PLAIN
Options:
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
0–255 Color index for the text.
Default Value = 7

Process

251

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CHARSIZE

R

ROTATE

R

LOCATE

C*12

Range

Description and Default
Height of characters, in plotter units (in or cm).
Default Value = 0.25 in or 0.65 cm

0.0–
360.0

Orientation of text with respect to the horizontal (positive
x axis), measured counterclockwise in degrees.
Default Value = 0.0 degrees
Method for locating text string.
Default Value = CENTER
Options:
LOWER LEFT

Place text in lower left corner.

LOWER RIGHT

Place text in lower right
corner.

CENTER

Center text.

Process

252

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Thin Text Fields
Name

THIN TEXT FIELDS

Alternate Name REMOVE CHAR DUPS
Function

This process eliminates multiple labeling for a particular value of an
attribute.
One application of this process is labeling the operator for only one
well on a platform, if all of the operators are the same.
The file must be sorted with this field as the first or second key text
field.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• DATAIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

DATAOUT
MFDOUT
• FIELDS

I
I

Description and Default
Name of the input file.

0–5

C*24

FLDNAMES C*20

R2003.12.0

Range

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.
Default Value = Based on the input data file name

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1
Array of up to 10 field numbers of character fields to thin.
Array of up to 10 names for the new fields that contains
the thinned data. The order of this array must correspond
to the order of input fields.
Default Value = Input field names

Process

253

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Thinning
Name

THINNING

Alternate Name THIN
Function

This process thins a data file by only keeping records that pass
specified criteria, such as line/area name or windowing the Area of
Interest (AOI).

Valid Combinations for input fields if THINMODE = ALL LINES
Fields
LINE
X-FIELD Y-FIELD SEG ID
File Type
NAME
FALT


Req

VERT


Req

CNTR
Req
Req


XSEC
Req



SSEC/PROF
Req



DATA *


Opt
Opt
* For a data file at least one of these fields must be present

HORIZON
NAME





Opt

Valid Combinations for input fields if THINMODE = SINGLE LINE or SINGLE
AREA.
Fields
SHOTPOINT
LINE NAME
AREA NAME
THINMODE
NUMBER
SINGLE LINE
Req

Opt*
SINGLE AREA

Req
Opt*
* The Shotpoint Number field is Required if METHOD = DIVISIBLE

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

MFDIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

C*24

I

FILEOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

Description and Default
Name of input file.
Range Options:
Data, contour, fault, vertex, cross-section and
seismic-section files

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1

Process

254

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

THINMODE C*12

Range

Description and Default
Type of thinning to perform.
Default Value = ALL LINES
Options:
= Entire dataset with regard to lines.
Appropriate for seismic/profile,
vertex, fault, seismic-section,
cross-section, and contour lines.
=
Entire dataset without regard to
ALL POINTS
lines. Appropriate for scattered
data.
=
In a single line specified by line
SINGLE
name.
LINE
= In an area specified by area name.
SINGLE
AREA
Thinning algorithm. Used if THINMODE = ALL LINES
or ALL POINTS.
Default Value = NORMAL
Options:
ALL LINES

METHOD

C*12

NORMAL
DIVISIBLE

° LINEAREA

R2003.12.0

= Pick every DINCR shotpoint starting
with point STARTPNT.
= Pick every shotpoint whose shotpoint
number is evenly divisible by DINCR.
This option is valid only if the input
file is a data file

C*80

Line or area name. Required if THINMODE = SINGLE
LINE or SINGLE AREA.

STARTPNT

I

Starting point to delete. If THINMODE = ALL LINES,
then the first and last points are kept.
Default Value = 1

DINCR

I

Increment for deleting and the divisor if THINMODE =
SINGLE LINE and METHOD = DIVISIBLE. “Valid
Combinations” on page 254 shows which fields are
required for a given mode of operation.
Note: A Shotpoint Number field is Required if
METHOD = DIVISIBLE.
Default Value = 2

XFLD

I

Field number of X field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

Process

255

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

YFLD

I

Field number of Y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

SHTPTFLD

I

Field number of the Shotpoint Number field.
Default Value = First Shotpoint Number field

LINIDFLD

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in line file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

LINNMFLD

I

Field number of the Line Name field.
Default Value = First Line Name field

HORNMFLD

I

Field number of the Horizon Name field.
Default Value = First Horizon Name field

ARENMFLD

I

Field number of the Area Name field.
Default Value = First Area Name field

° WINFLDS

I

Array of up to 10 numbers of fields to use for windowing
the file. Required if the data in the file is windowed.
Note: Only points falling in the window specified by
WINMINS & WINMAXS are subjected to the
thinning algorithm.

° WINMINS

R

Array of up to 10 values for the minimum window limit,
in the same position as the corresponding WINFLDS field
being windowed. Required if the data in the file is
windowed.

° WINMAXS

R

Array of up to 10 values for the maximum window limit,
in the same position as the corresponding WINFLDS field
being windowed. Required if the data in the file is
windowed.

Process

256

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Three D Time To Depth
Name

THREE D TIME TO DEPT

Alternate Name T T D I
Function

This process performs time-to-depth conversion using a pseudo
three-dimensional grid model. Velocity values are interpolated at the
time positions recorded in the input time grid.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• VELOGRID

C*24

MFDVELO

I

• TIMEGRID

C*24

MFDTIME

I

Range

Description and Default
Name of the input file that contains the pseudo
three-dimensional input velocity grid.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input
three-dimensional velocity grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input file that contains the time grid.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input time grid.
Default Value = 0

• TIMETOP

R

Time to first velocity layer.

• TIMEBOT

R

Time at bottom velocity layer.

• TIMEDEL

R

Delta time between velocity layers.

• GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

Name of the output grid of interpolated velocities.
0–5

Number of the MFD to contain output grid of interpolated
velocities.
Default Value = 1

Process

257

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Three D Timeslice
Name

THREE D TIMESLICE

Alternate Name TSLICE
Function

This process creates a pseudo three-dimensional grid file in the special
timeslice format by concatenating ZIMS grid files in normal or
timeslice format. The output is a grid file in the special timeslice
format that can be used as input to the THREE D TIME TO DEPT
Process.
Each input grid must have the same increments and minimums for x
and Y, and the same maximum Y. Every regular grid, except for the
timeslices, must also have the same maximum X. These files must be
entered in the order required by the THREE D TIME TO DEPT
Process. The grids must be evenly spaced in time and are concatenated
sequentially from shallow to deep.
The optional top slice grid in special timeslice format can be followed
by at most 30 grids in normal format and finally by an optional bottom
slice grid in special timeslice format.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

° TOPSLICE

C*24

MFDTOP

I

° GRIDIN

MFDGRDS

R2003.12.0

Range

Name of the input top, the most shallow, timeslice grid.
See discussion in the Function section.
0–5

C*24

I

Description and Default

Number of the MFD that contains the top timeslice grid.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 30 names of normal input grid files to use
in the creation of the timeslice. See discussion in the
Function section.

0–5

Array of up to 30 numbers of the MFDs that contains the
input grids in the same sequential list position as the
corresponding input grid in GRIDIN.
Default Value = 0

Process

258

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

° BOTSLICE

C*24

MFDBOT

I

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

Range

Description and Default
Name of the input bottom (deepest) timeslice grid. See
discussion in the Function section.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the bottom timeslice
grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output timeslice grid.
Default Value = Based on the first grid file name

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output timeslice grid.
Default Value = 1

Process

259

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Time Migration
Name

TIME MIGRATION

Alternate Name TIME MIGR
Function

This process performs forward or reverse time migration using normal
ray tracing through a single layer. The algorithm is described in
“Krigeage Applied to Geophysics” in Geophysical Prospecting 24.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• TIMEGRID

C*24

MFDTIME

I

VELOGRID

C*24

MFDVELO

I

TIMEFALT

C*24

MFDTFLT

I

VELOFALT

C*24

MFDVFLT

I

DATAIN
MFDDATA

Range

Name of the time horizon grid.
0–5

0–5

R2003.12.0

I

Number of the MFD that contains the velocity grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the time horizon fault file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the time horizon fault
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the velocity fault file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the velocity fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input control point file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

TDATAOUT C*24
MFDTDATA

Number of the MFD that contains the time horizon file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the velocity grid.

C*24
I

Description and Default

Number of the MFD that contains the input control point
file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output grid node data file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid node data
file.
Default Value = 1

Process

260

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

VECTOUT

C*24

MFDVECT

I

Range

Name of the output vector file.
0–5

ODATAOUT C*24
MFDODATA

I

TFLTOUT

C*24

MFDTOUT

I

DATAOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

R2003.12.0

I

Number of the MFD to contain the output vector file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output over migration grid node data file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output over migration
grid node data file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output time fault file. Used if there are time
horizon faults involved.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output time fault file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output control point file. Used if there are
control points to migrate/unmigrate.

0–5

FDATAOUT C*24
MFDFDATA

Description and Default

Number of the MFD to contain the output control point
file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the output control point migration/unmigration
failure file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output control point
failure file.
Default Value = 1

DIRECT

C*8

Direction of migration.
Default Value = FORWARD
Options:
FORWARD
REVERSE

TIMETYPE

C*12

Type of time used.
Default Value = ONE WAY TIME
Options:
ONE WAY TIME
TWO WAY TIME

Process

261

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

TIMEUNIT

C*12

Time units.
Default Value = SECONDS
Options:
SECONDS
MILLISECONDS

FILLGAP

C*8

Method for handling fault segments that cannot be
migrated.
Default Value = BREAK
Options:
= Connect across the missing fault
CONNECT
segments
=
Break fault into two segments
BREAK

SAMPRATE C*8

R2003.12.0

Range

Description and Default

Sampling rate for migrating time horizon faults.
Default Value = COARSEST
Options:
COARSEST = 1 point per grid increment
COARSE

= 2 points per grid increment

MEDIUM

= 4 points per grid increment

FINE

= 8 points per grid increment

XFLD

I

Field number of the X field in the input control point file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of the Y field in the input control point file.
Default Value = First Y field

ZFLD

I

Field number of the Z Value field in the input control
point file that is to be overwritten.
Default Value = 0, create a new Z Value field

FLDNAME

C*20

Name of the Z Value field for the output control point file
if a new file is created.
Default Value = MIGRATED TIME

Process

262

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Title Block
Name

TITLE BLOCK

Alternate Name T BLK
Function

This process draws a title block on the plot. The title block has room
for up to five lines of title text, plus space for the plot author, the plot
scale, a file number, the company name, and the company location.
The size of the lettering is proportional to the height of the title block.

Notes

The PICTURE Process must be used to open a graphics file and picture
before this process is used.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

TITLE1

C*80

First line of title text.
Default Value = Blank

TITLE2

C*80

Second line of title text.
Default Value = Blank

TITLE3

C*80

Third line of title text.
Default Value = Blank

TITLE4

C*80

Fourth line of title text.
Default Value = Blank

TITLE5

C*80

Fifth line of title text.
Default Value = Blank

AUTHOR

C*20

Text naming the author.
Default Value = Blank

SCALE

C*20

Text to put in the scale area of the title block.
Default Value = Blank

FILENUM

C*20

Text to put in the file number area of the title block.
Default Value = Blank

COMPANY

C*80

Text name of the company.
Default Value = Blank

COLOCATE C*80

R2003.12.0

Range

Description and Default

Text naming the location of the company.
Default Value = Blank

Process

263

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

XLOWLEFT

R

YLOWLEFT

R

HEIGHT

R

Height of the title block, in plotter units (in or cm).
This must be less than or equal to the y offset for the
picture (as described in YBMARGIN of PICTURE
Process parameters for map dimensions on page 28)
unless XLOWLEFT and YLOWLEFT are specified.
Default Value = Bottom margin of the picture minus 1 in
or 2.5 cm

C*12

Method for locating the title block.
Default Value = LOWER RIGHT
Options:
LOWER LEFT = Place title block in lower left corner;
it is placed in y offset area.
LOWER RIGHT = Place title in lower right corner; it
is placed in y offset area.
ARBITRARY = Let XLOWLEFT, YLOWLEFT specify
the x and y positions of the lower left corner of the

LOCATION

The x position for the title block lower left corner, in
plotter units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION =
ARBITRARY.
Default Value = 2.0 in or 5.0 cm
The y position for the title block lower left corner, in
plotter units (in or cm). Used if LOCATION =
ARBITRARY.
Default Value = 0.0 in or 0.0 cm

title block in plotter units (in or cm). Position title
block anywhere in map limits/offsets.

R2003.12.0

Process

264

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Transform Coords
Name

TRANSFORM COORDS

Alternate Name T COORD
Function

This process transforms x and y coordinates to Latitude and Longitude
coordinates, and the inverse. The transformation is controlled by the
projection set up with the PROJECTION Process. The output data file
contains X and Y fields or Longitude and Latitude fields, depending on
the direction of the transformation.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN

Range

C*24
I

FILEOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

DIRECT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

C*4

Description and Default
Name of the input data file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output data file.
Default Value = 1
Direction of the transformation.
Default Value = LLXY
Options:
LLXY = Latitude/Longitude to X/Y
XYLL = X/Y to Latitude/Longitude

INFLDN

I

Field number of the field in the input data file that
contains Latitude or y values.
Default Value = First field of the correct type

INFLDE

I

Field number of the field in the input data file that
contains Longitude or x values.
Default Value = First field of the correct type

Process

265

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
OUTFDNLT

Data
Type
I

Range

Description and Default
Field number of the output field that will receive Latitude or y
values.
If N denotes the number of fields on the input control point file,
then legitimate values for the output field would be from 1 to
N+2 (If OUTFDNLT is N+1 then OUTFDELN should be N+2.
The reverse is also true.)
The value of 0 or N+1 (or N+2) means that a new field is created; a value from 1 to N means that the corresponding field on
the input file is replaced by this output field.
Default Value = 0, create new field

OUTFDELN

I

Field number of the output field that will receive Longitude or x
values.
If N denotes the number of fields on the input control point file,
then legitimate values for the output field would be from 1 to
N+2 (If OUTFDNLT is N+2 then OUTFDELN should be N+1.
The reverse is also true.)
The value of 0 or N+1 (or N+2) means that a new field is created; a value from 1 to N means that the corresponding field on
the input file is replaced by this output field.
Default Value = 0, create new field

R2003.12.0

FLDNAMEN C*20

Name of the output field to receive Latitude or y values.
Default Value = Standard name for the type of field being
created

FLDNAMEE C*20

Name of the output field to receive Longitude or x values.
Default Value = Standard name for the type of field being
created

ZNON

Null data value for the file being created.
Default Value = ZNON value of the input file

R

Process

266

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Trend Gridding
Name

TREND GRIDDING

Alternate Name TREND
Function

This process builds a grid representing a mathematical function having
a specified number of terms (NTERMS).
This grid may or may not represent the classic Nth degree trend
surface, depending upon whether the correct number of terms have
been selected. Input for building the function and resulting grid can be
either a data file or another grid.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

C*24

MFDIN

I

INFLD

I

Description and Default
Name of the input grid or control point file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0
Field number of the desired field in the control point file.
Default Value = First Z Value field

GRIDOUT

C*24

Name of the output grid file.

MFDOUT

I

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1

NTERMS

I

1–28

Number of terms in the output trend grid, e.g., a linear
surface has 3 terms.
Default Value = 3, linear surface

XMIN

R

Minimum x coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum x value of the data

XMAX

R

Maximum x coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded x coordinate that is closest to
the actual maximum x value of the data

YMIN

R

Minimum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual minimum y value of the data

Process

267

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

YMAX

R

Maximum y coordinate of the grid area.
Default Value = Rounded y coordinate that is closest to
the actual maximum y value of the data

XINC

R

The x increment for the output grid. Used if the input is a
data file.
Default Value = For grid file, XINC from the input grid
file
or
For data file,
( XMAX – XMIN ) × ( YMAX – YMIN )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------number of points in file

R2003.12.0

YINC

R

The y increment for the output grid.
Default Value = For grid file, YINC from the input grid
file
or
For data file, XINC

ZMIN

R

Minimum grid value allowed during the grid creation
phase.
Default Value = –1.0E+30

ZMAX

R

Maximum grid value allowed during the grid creation
phase.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

NXBLOCKS

I

The x block factor if Block Averaging the input grid.
By specifying a value for either NXBLOCKS or
NYBLOCKS, you imply that you do want to Block
Average the input grid. This value must be at least 1.
If both NXBLOCKS and NYBLOCKS are 1, there is no
Block Average effect.
If NXBLOCKS is specified but NYBLOCKS is not,
NYBLOCKS defaults to a value of 1.
Default Value = 1

NYBLOCKS

I

The y block factor if Block Averaging the input grid.
By specifying a value for either NXBLOCKS or
NYBLOCKS, you imply that you do want to Block
Average the input grid. This value must be at least 1.
If both NXBLOCKS and NYBLOCKS are 1, there is no
Block Average effect.
If NYBLOCKS is specified but NXBLOCKS is not,
NXBLOCKS defaults to a value of 1.
Default Value = NXBLOCKS

Process

268

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

MEANDISP

C*16

Display of residual absolute normalized mean and
standard deviation.
Default Value = DISPLAY MEAN
Options:
DISPLAY MEAN = Display mean information
NO DISPLAY MEAN = Do not display mean
information

RESIDISP

C*16

Display of residual as a fraction of the standard deviation.
Default Value = DISPLAY RESID
Options:
DISPLAY RESID = Display residual information
NO DISPLAY RESID = Do not display residual
information

Process

269

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Tri Scaling
Name

TRI SCALING

Alternate Name SCALE XY
Function

This process converts the x, y coordinates of a dataset to another x, y
coordinate system using triangulation scaling.
Triangulation scaling is used to transform the x, y coordinates of a
dataset to another x, y coordinate system. Between 3 and 500 scaling
points can be provided to define the triangulation scaling lattice.
For each data point to convert, the lattice triangle that contains the
point (or the closest triangle if the point is outside the lattice) is found
and its scaling parameters are used to convert the data point’s x, y
coordinates to the new coordinate system.

Example
TRI SCALING 010,000: DATAIN = ’DIGITIZER
COORDINATES’,
DATAOUT = ’MAP COORDINATES’,
NUMSCAL = 4,
XIN = 0.0, 0.5, 0.5, 0.0,
YIN = 0.0, 0.0, 0.5, 0.5,
XOUT = 1250, 2500, 2500, 1250,
YOUT = 5000, 5000, 6250, 6250 /

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FILEIN
MFDIN

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

C*24
I

Description and Default
Name of the input file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input file.
Default Value = 0

FILEOUT

C*24

Name of the output file.
Default Value = Based upon input file name

MFDOUT

I

XFLD

I

Field number of X field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of Y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output file.
Default Value = 1

Process

270

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range
3–50

Description and Default

NUMSCALE

I

Number of scaling registration points.
Default Value = 4

XINPUTS

R

Array of up to 50 x coordinates for the scaling points in
the input x, y coordinate system.

YINPUTS

R

Array of up to 50 y coordinates for the scaling points in
the input x,y coordinate system.

XOUTPUTS

R

Array of up to 50 x coordinates for the scaling points in
the output x, y coordinate system.

YOUTPUTS

R

Array of up to 50 y coordinates for the scaling points in
the output x, y coordinate system.

Process

271

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

User Grid Filter
Name

USER GRID FILTER

Alternate Name USER FILTER
Function

This process filters a grid by means of a user-defined filter operator
grid. The input to this process is GRIDIN, the grid to filter. You can
create a grid operator to filter your input grid in one of three ways:

• you can use an input grid
• you can use the parameter WGHT to define each node
manually
• you can use the RING method to define the grid operator
The output is a grid file whose node values are determined by the
filtering process.
The methods of defining the grid operator for filtering your input grid
work as follows:
1.

You can define the grid operator from an input grid attached to an
MFD. The rows and columns of your input grid must be equal;
the grid must be a square. The grid can be as large as 29 x 29 if
compensation is applied, or 513 x 513 if no compensation is used.
Larger stencils require longer computation time.

If the grid operator is defined by supplying a grid file, consider the
number of rows and columns; ensure that the grid is square.The User
Grid Filter ignores the x and y minimum and maximum information in
the grid header.
2.

You can manually define the grid rate values for a grid up to
13 x 13 using WGHT.

3.

You can use the RING parameter to assign grid node values to
groups of grid nodes arranged in concentric rings.

If the grid operator exhibits ring symmetry, you can define up to 99
ring weights.
You can filter a grid that contains undefined values. These undefined
values can exist in the input grid data itself, or they can be caused by
faults crossing the grid. The User Defined Filter process has two ways
of compensating for the presence of undefined values in the grid you
have selected to filter. The first method is to use a ring-symmetric
compensation method for grid operators that display ring symmetry.
The second method is to use an asymmetric compensation method. If
you do not want a compensation formula applied, set CMPNSATE =
NO, and compensation for undefined values is not applied.

R2003.12.0

Process

272

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Example

This example is a grid with 25 rows and 25 columns. Using 13,13 as
the center point, we can calculate what the first 9 rings look like. The
table below lists the grid nodes describing the circumferences of the
first nine rings:

Terms Array Element (Row,Column): (25,25)

R2003.12.0

Radius

8

(11,10) (10,11) (10,15) (11,16) (15,10) (16,11) (15,16) (16,15
)

13

8

(12,10) (10,12) (10,14) (12,16) (14,10) (16,12) (14,16) (16,14
)

10

4

(13,10) (10,13) (13,16) (16,13)

9

4

(11,11) (15,11) (11,15) (15,15)

8

8

(12,11) (11,12) (11,14) (12,15) (14,11) (15,12) (14,15) (15,14
)

5

4

(13,11) (11,13) (13,15) (15,13)

4

4

(12,12) (12,14) (14,12) (14,14)

2

4

(13,12) (12,13) (13,14) (14,13)

1

1

(13,13)

0

Process

273

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

The figure below shows the array of grid nodes. Rings 2, 5, 7, and 9 are
drawn through the points describing that ring.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

1-------5--------10--------15--------20--------25
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + o n + a + + + + a + n o + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + n + + a + + + + a + + n + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a 9 8 7 8 9 + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + 9 6 5 4 5 6 9 + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + 8 5 3 2 3 5 8 + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + 7 4 2 + 2 4 7 + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + 8 5 3 2 3 5 8 + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + 9 6 5 4 5 6 9 + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a 9 8 7 8 9 + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + n + + a + + + + a + + n + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + o n + a + + + + a + n o + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a
+ + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a + + + + a

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

GRIDOPER

C*24

MFDOPER

1

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

Name of the input grid file, the grid to filter.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the grid file to use as the filter operator.

0-5

I

Description and Default

Number of the MFD that contains the grid operator file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the fault file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0

Process

274

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

GRIDOUT

C*24

MFDOUT

I

Range

Description and Default
Name of the output grid file.
Default Value = Based on input grid

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output grid file.
Default Value = 1

CMPNSATE

Use of compensation for undefined values encountered
while filtering.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES = Apply compensations
NO = Do not apply compensations

SYMMETRY C*8

Type of filter operator symmetry determining how the
filter operator node weights are specified. Ignored if
GRIDOPER is specified.
Default Value = NONE
Options:
NONE = The node weights for the operator are specified
(WGHT0101–WGHT1313)

QUADRANT = The node weights for the upper-left
quadrant of the filter operator are specified
(WGHT0101–WGHT0707). The remaining quadrants
of the operator are filled by copying and mirroring the
data from the upper-left quadrant

RING = Ring weights (RING1–RING99) are specified.
The specified ring weights are copied to each
node in the specified ring.

WGHTiijj

R2003.12.0

R

Array of up to 169 values specifying the node weights for
row ii and column jj. Used if SYMMETRY = NONE or
QUADRANT. Ignored if GRIDOPER is specified.
If SYMMETRY = NONE, then up to 169 node weights
can be specified (WGHT0101–WGHT1313).
If SYMMETRY = QUADRANT, then up to 49 node
weights can be specified (WGHT0101–WGHT0707).
Note: The rows and columns are specified as 2 digits,
01–31.
Default Value = 0.0

Process

275

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
RINGi

R2003.12.0

Data
Type
R

Range

Description and Default
Array of up to 99 values specifying the ring weights
(RING1–RING99). Ignored if GRIDOPER is specified.
The center node of the operator is RING1, and each
successive ring is the next largest concentric circle around
the center node.
Default Value = 0.0

Process

276

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Vel Fun Time To Depth
Name

VEL FUN TIME TO DEPT

Alternate Name T T D II
Function

This process performs time-to-depth conversion using the velocity
function method. This module is called once for each formation of
interest, starting with a formation that has known depth at the top of the
formation. Each call can produce depth at the bottom of the target
formation. The velocity function can be specified by four different
combinations of grids and constants.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• TOPDGRID

C*24

MFDTOPD

I

• TOPTGRID

C*24

MFDTOPT

I

• BOTTGRID

C*24

MFDBOTT

I

° TOPVGRID

C*24

MFDTOPV

I

° INTVGRID

C*24

MFDINTV

I

Range

Description and Default
Name of the input file that contains the depth at the top of
the formation.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the depth at the top of
the target formation.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input file that contains the time at the top of
the formation.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the time at the top of
the target formation.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input file that contains the time at the bottom
of the target formation.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the time at the bottom
of the target formation.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input file that contains velocity at the top of
the target formation. Required if METHOD = LINEAR
GRIDDED.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the velocity at the top
of the target formation.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input file that contains the interval velocity.
Required if METHOD = GRIDDED.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the interval velocity
grid.
Default Value = 0

Process

277

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

° ACCLGRID

C*24

MFDACCL

I

• BOTDGRID

C*24

MFDBOTD

I

METHOD

TEMPUNIT

Name of the input file that contains the acceleration for
the target formation. Required if METHOD = LINEAR
GRIDDED.
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains acceleration for the
target formation.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output file to contain the depth at the bottom
of the target formation.

0–5

C*16

I

Description and Default

Number of the MFD to contain the output depth grid.
Default Value = 1
Type of velocity function model to use.
Default Value = CONSTANT
Options:
CONSTANT = Constant average velocity for the
formation
=
Grid of average velocity for the
GRIDDED
formation
=
Constant initial velocity and
LINEAR
constant
acceleration in the
CONSTANT
formation
= Grid of initial velocity and grid of
LINEAR
acceleration in the formation
GRIDDED

0–99

FORTRAN logical unit to use for a required scratch file.
The user is advised to rely on the program to set this
variable.
Default Value = 37

° TOPVELO

R

Constant velocity at the top of the target formation.
Required if METHOD = LINEAR CONSTANT.

° INTVELO

R

Constant velocity through the target formation. Required
if METHOD = CONSTANT.

° ACCELER

R

Constant acceleration through the target formation.
Required if METHOD = LINEAR CONSTANT.

R

Conversion factor for converting units of velocity to units
of time. 2000 converts two-way millisecond seismic times
to meters/second.
Default Value = 2000.0

SCALE

R2003.12.0

Range

Process

278

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Velocity Gridding
Name

VELOCITY GRIDDING

Alternate Name GRID VEL
Function

This process grids velocity data honoring user-supplied confidence
factors. The file that contains the data is assumed to contain x, y, z and
confidence factor fields. The algorithm builds up to five grids per
execution. The user can control the weighting of each data point
through the RADINNER, RADOUTER and POWER parameters.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

• DATAIN

C*24

Name of the input data file.

MFDIN

I

XFLD

I

Field number of X field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of Y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

INFLDS

I

Array of up to 5 numbers of z fields to grid.
Default Value = Fields number of 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 are used

CONFFLDS

I

Array of up to 5 numbers of confidence factor fields, one
for each z field.
Default Value = Fields number of 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 are used

• RADINNER

R

Radius of inner weighting circle. The weighting function
is 1.0 inside this circle.

• RADOUTER

R

Radius of outer weighting circle. The weighting function
is 0.0 outside this circle.

• POWER

R

Exponent on the weighting function in the ring between
RADINNER and RADOUTER.

• GRIDS

C*24

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input data file.
Default Value = 0

Array of up to 5 output grid names.
The fields specified in INFLDS and CONFFLDS are used
to build the grids in the corresponding positions in
GRIDS.

Process

279

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDGRD

I

0–5

Description and Default
Array of up to 5 numbers of the MFDs for the output
grids, in the same position as the corresponding output
grid in GRIDS.
Default Value = 1

• XMIN

R

Minimum x coordinate of the output gridding area.

• YMIN

R

Minimum y coordinate of the output gridding area.

• XMAX

R

Maximum x coordinate of the output gridding area.

• YMAX

R

Maximum y coordinate of the output gridding area.

• XINC

R

Grid increment in the x direction for the grids to create.

• YINC

R

Grid increment in the y direction for the grids to create.

R

Null data value for the output grid.
Default Value = 1.0E+30

ZNON

R2003.12.0

Range

Process

280

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Volume Report
Name

VOLUME REPORT

Alternate Name VOL REPORT
Function

This process generates a volumetrics report on a disk file, a
volumetrics total file from the data files output by the
VOLUMETRICS Process, or both.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• DATAINS

C*24

MFDINS

I

TRANSLAT

C*24

MFDTRAN

I

TOTALS

R2003.12.0

C*24

Range

Description and Default
Array of up to 10 names of the RESULTS files output by
VOLUMETRICS Process.
At least one file name must be provided.

0–5

Array of up to 10 numbers of the MFDs that contains the
volumetric results files, in the same position as the
corresponding DATAINS file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the translation file that relates the polygon
Segment IDs found in the volumetrics data files with the
polygon names.
This file tabulates the Segment ID against a text field that
contains the polygon name and can either be a data file or
a vertex file. If this file is provided, then the polygon
name is output to the report instead of the polygon
Segment ID.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the translation file.
Default Value = 0
Array of up to 5 names of the input Volumetrics
RESULTS files.
The totals extracted from these files are added to the
report total to produce a grand total. The totals written to
the output file are not influenced by any input total files.
Note: These files are only used if a report file is being
created with a grand total.
Default Value = Blank

Process

281

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDTOTS

I

DATAOUT

C*24

0–5

Description and Default
Array of up to 5 numbers of the MFDs that contains the
input TOTALS files, in the same position as the
corresponding input file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output total file.
This file tabulates the polygon Segment ID versus the
total for each polygon, and contains the polygon names if
a translation file was input. The totals written to the
output file are not influenced by any input total files.
Default Value = Blank

MFDOUT

I

REPORT

C*80

IFLDSEG

I

Field number of the Segment ID field in the translation
file.
Default Value = First Seg ID field

IFLDTXT

I

Field number of the Text field in the translation file.
Default Value = First Text field

• GRIDS

R2003.12.0

Range

C*24

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output total file.
Default Value = 1
Name of the disk report file to write to the output
formatted disk file. This file has a 132 byte record width;
that is, it is 132 characters wide.
Default Value = Blank

Array of up to 10 names of the grids whose volumetrics
results are tabulated in this process.

Process

282

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

TYPEREPT

C*24

Range

Description and Default
Type of volumetrics data to tabulate.
Default Value = POSITIVE VOLUME
Options:
POSITIVE VOLUME

= Volume of the body over the
positive area
NEGATIVE
= Volume of the body that is
VOLUME
below the base plane
NET VOLUME
= Positive volume reduced by
negative volume
POSITIVE AREA
= Area in the composite polygon
where the top surface of the
body is above the horizontal
base plane
NEGATIVE AREA
= Amount of area in the
composite polygon for which
the surface is defined and
negative
NET AREA
= Area in the property polygon
multiplied by the area scale
factor
NULL AREA
= Portion of the composite
polygon over which the surface
area of the body was null
SLICE THICKNESS
= Amount the baseplane
argument is biased by
SLICEINC until the cutoff
value is reached
NET SURFACE AREA
= Surface area of the top
surface of the body
over the net area
AREA OUTSIDE THE AOI
= Portion of the polygon
area that is outside the
grid limits
NEGATIVE SURFACE
= Amount of surface area
AREA
in the composite
polygon for which the
surface is defined and
negative

R2003.12.0

Process

283

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

BASE

C*4

Range

Description and Default
Whether the volumetrics slice option was used during the
volumetrics runs. If YES, then the slice base value
BASEVAL must be supplied.
Default Value = NO
Options:
= Volumetrics slice option was used
YES
NO

R2003.12.0

= Volumetrics slice option was not
used.

BASEVAL

R

Volumetrics slice base value. Used if BASE = YES.
Default Value = 0.0

SCALE

R

Scale factor to apply to the results.
For example, if the volumes stored in these file(s) are in
cu.ft. and you want the report in acre.ft., the scale factor
should be set to 2.295684E–05, the conversion factor
between cu.ft. and acre.ft.
Default Value = 1.0

SCALETOT

C*4

Whether the scale factor is applied to the values taken
from the input total file(s).
Note: The scale factor is always applied to the values
taken from the input volumetrics data file(s).
Default Value = NO
Options:
= Apply the scale factor to the values
YES
from the input total file(s)
= Do not apply the scale to the
NO
values from the input total file(s)

TITLE

C*80

Array of up to 10 entries representing lines in the title on
each page of the report.
Default Value = Blank

GRANDTOT C*80

Grand total text.
The grand total is printed at the bottom of the report. If
this parameter is not specified, then the grand total line is
omitted from the report.
Default Value = Blank

SEGHEAD

Header text for the column that contains the polygon
name or Segment ID. This text string can contain up to
three lines of header text, each line SEGWIDTH long.
Default Value = Blank

C*80

Process

284

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

SEGWIDTH

I

COLUMNS

C*20

COLHEADS C*80

COLWIDTH

R2003.12.0

I

Range
5–40

Description and Default
Width of the polygon Segment ID or name column.
Default Value = 20
Array of up to 10 entries describing the contents of each
column written to the report, excluding the total and the
polygon name/segment columns.
If a column is to contain the results from a single grid,
then the description for that column is the index of that
grid in the GRIDS array.
For example, a ′1′ causes the results for the first grid listed
in the GRIDS array to print in the specified column. A
column can contain a subtotal.
The description for a subtotal column is a list of the
indices of the grids whose results are summed to create
the subtotal, separated by a comma (,) or a plus sign (+).
For example, 1+2, or 1,2 would produce a subtotal for the
first two grids listed in the GRIDS array.
Default Value = Blank
Array of up to 10 entries listing the header text for each
column described by the contents of the array
COLUMNS. Each text string can contain up to three
lines, each line COLWIDTH characters long.
Default Value = Blank

10–40 Width of all columns except for the polygon Segment ID
or name column.
Default Value = 15

PRINTTOT

C*4

Printing of a total column as the last column on the report.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO

PAGENUM

C*4

Printing of the page number in the top right corner of each
page.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO

Process

285

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

PAGEBIAS

I

Range

Description and Default
Number added to the calculated page number before it is
printed.
Default Value = 0

DATE

C*4

Printing of the date at the top of each page on the report.
Default Value = YES
Options:
YES
NO

FILEREP

C*4

Printing of the report file name in the top left corner of
each page on the report.
Default Value = NO
Options:
YES
NO

POSITION

C*8

Lateral position of the report on the page. This option
allows both the title and columns to be centered on the
page, or the column to be left-justified and the title
starting in the specified position right of the left margin.
For example, if POSITION = ′10′ then the title would be
indented 9 characters from the left side of the page.
If CENTER or CENTRE is specified then both the page
title and the columns are centered on the page. Any
numbers specified for this parameter must be enclosed in
quotes (e.g., POSITION = ’nn’).
Default Value = CENTER

PAGELEN

I

Number of lines per page on the report.
Default Value = 58

DNUM

I

Use number of the optional output DATA BLOCK.
This Data Block is filled with the number of physical
pages and the number of logical pages in the report.
Generally, the number of logical and physical pages are
the same. However, if a single line of the report cannot fit
on one physical page, then each logical page consists of
multiple physical pages.
The Data Block must be of type INTEGER and contain at
least 2 items. The number of physical pages is deposited
in the first element and the number of logical pages in the
second.

Process

286

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Volumetrics
Name

VOLUMETRICS

Alternate Name VOLM
Function

This process computes the volume between the surface represented by
the input grid and the flat surface having baseplane value = Z, over a
region(s) of integration specified by an input polygon(s). The input
surface can be faulted.
The integration can also be limited to any or all:

• regions where the input grid surface is positive
• areas common to both the initial region of integration and one
or more constraint polygons
• areas where a (non-faulted) constraint grid is greater than
some specified constraint value
Parameters
Parameter
Name
• GRIDIN

C*24

MFDIN

I

FAULTS

C*24

MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

I

VERTICES

C*24

MFDVERT

I

RESULTS

C*24

MFDOUT

I

Range

Description and Default
Name of the input grid file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input fault file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input polygon vertex file. If not specified, the
region of integration is the entire grid Area of Interest
(AOI).

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the vertex file.
Default Value = 0
Name of the output control point file to contain the
volumetrics results.

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output control point
file.
Default Value = 1

Process

287

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

AREASCAL

R

Area scale factor.
Default Value = 1.0

VOLMSCAL

R

Volume scale factor.
Default Value = 1.0

VOLMTYPE C*12

Type of volumes computed and printed for this surface.
Default Value = POSITIVE+NET
Options:
POSITIVE+NET = Positive and net volumes are
printed.
= Only net volumes are printed.
NET ONLY

SURFAREA

C*12

Computation and reporting of surface area.
Default Value = NO SURFACE AREA
Options:
= Surface area is determined and
SURFACE
printed.
AREA
= Surface area is not determined and
NO SURFACE
not printed
AREA

BASEPLAN

R

Base plane value.
Default Value = 0.0

SLICEINC

R

Slice thickness. Volumes are generated for slices of
thickness SLICEINC from the baseplane upwards to the
CUTOFF.
Default Value = 0.0

SLICELIM

R

Slice limit. Used if SLICEINC is not zero.
Default Value = 0.0

° BOUND1

R

Bound for the first constraint grid, so that the region of
integration is limited to those areas where the surface of
the first constraint grid exceeds the value specified by
BOUND1. Required if the first constraint grid is supplied.

° BOUND2

R

Bound for the second constraint grid, so that the region of
integration is limited to those areas where the surface of
the second constraint grid exceeds the value specified by
BOUND2. Required if the second constraint grid is
supplied.

Process

288

Landmark

R2003.12.0

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

CONGRID1

C*24

MFDCGRD1

I

CONGRID2

C*24

MFDCGRD2

I

CONPOLY1

C*24

MFDCPOL1

I

CONPOLY2

C*24

MFDCPOL2

I

Range

Description and Default
Name of the first input constraint grid.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the first input
constraint grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the second input constraint grid.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the second input
constraint grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the first input constraint polygon file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the first input
constraint polygon.
Default Value = 0
Name of the second input constraint polygon file.
Default Value = Blank

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the second input
constraint polygon.
Default Value = 0

Process

289

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Water Saturation
Name

WATER SATURATION

Alternate Name AVERAGE SW GRID
Function

This process transforms constant porosity curves of water saturation
(Sw) vs. Height (H) above the oil-water contact (OWC) to an average
Sw grid across a given formation.
First, curves of Sw vs. H at constant porosity are transformed to
profiles mapped on a porosity (P) vs. H coordinate system. These new
curves are gridded using the line gridding algorithm to produce a grid
of Sw over P and H (Sw = f(P,H)). An integration is performed using
the formation structure grid(s) and the Sw = f(P,H) grid to produce a
grid of average water saturations across the formation.
The input water saturation curves should cover the range of height
above OWC to be found in top and bottom grids and the range of
porosity found in porosity grid. The gridding process extrapolates
beyond the data, but grid values in extrapolated regions should not be
considered reliable.
Two types of files are acceptable for input: profiles and contours. (For
a description of these file types, see “Appendix D. Import/Export” in
the Z-MAP Plus Reference manual.)

Notes

If only one curve is input, Sw is assumed independent of porosity
throughout the formation and the porosity value on the file is ignored.
(It can be any arbitrary non-ZNON value.) In this case the results are
independent of the values in, or absence of, a porosity grid.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

° TOPGRID

C*24

MFDTOP

I

° BOTGRID

C*24

MFDBOT

I

° MIDGRID

C*24

Range

Description and Default
Name of the formation top grid. Required if FORMSRCE
= TOP+BOTTOM.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the top grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the formation bottom grid. Required if
FORMSRCE = TOP+BOTTOM.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the bottom grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the formation midpoint grid. Required if
FORMSRCE = MIDPOINT.

Process

290

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

MFDMID

I

PORGRID

C*24

MFDPOR

I

° PCURVES

C*24

MFDPCRV

I

Range
0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the midpoint grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the formation porosity grid.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the porosity grid.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input water saturation (Sw) data. Required if
the input data shows Sw to vary with porosity.
These are digitized curves of constant porosity from a
surface defined with Sw as x value and height above oil
water contact (OWC) as y value. Each record contains an
X field of Sw, a Y field of height above OWC, a Segment
ID field, and a Z Value field of porosity that is constant
for each curve. See Function section for more
information.

0–5

PORHTOUT C*24

MFDPHOUT

I

PORHTIN

C*24

MFDPHIN

I

AVESWOUT C*24

R2003.12.0

Description and Default

Number of the MFD that contains the input water
saturation data.
Default Value = 0
Name of output grid of Sw as a function of porosity and
height.
This is an intermediate file, but it may need to be
preserved for user examination and possibly even editing.
Used if OUTTYPE = POROSITY+HEIGHT or BOTH.
Default Value = Based on TOPGRID or MIDGRID

0–5

Number of the MFD to contain the output water
saturation grid as a function of porosity and height.
Default Value = 1
Name of input grid of Sw as a function of porosity and
height. Used if OUTTYPE = WATER. SATURATION or
BOTH
Default Value = PORHTOUT

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input water
saturation grid as a function of porosity and height.
Default Value = MFDPHOUT
Name of output grid of average water saturation (Sw) as a
function of x and y over the area of the formation. Used if
OUTTYPE = WATER SATURATION or BOTH.
Default Value = Based on PORHTOUT

Process

291

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name
MFDAVESW

Data
Type
I

FORMSRCE C*12

OUTTYPE

C*16

Range
0–5

Description and Default
Number of the MFD to contain the output water
saturation grid as a function of x and Y.
Default Value = 1
Source of the formation.
Default Value = TOP+BOTTOM
Options:
TOP+BOTTOM = Use the top and bottom formation
guide
=
Use the midpoint grid
MIDPOINT
Phase of water saturation.
Default Value = BOTH
Options:
= Phase 1: Sw as a function of
POROSITY+
Porosity and Height
HEIGHT
= Phase 2: Sw as a function of x and
WATER
Y
SATURATION
BOTH

R2003.12.0

= Both Phase 1 and Phase 2

PORINC

R

Grid increment for the porosity (X) coordinate for the
output water saturation grid as a function of porosity and
height.
Default Value = Calculated

HGTINC

R

Grid increment for the height (Y) coordinate for output
water saturation grid as a function of porosity and height.
Default Value = Calculated

WATERSAT

R

Water saturation value assumed at a height of zero.
Default Value = 100

OWCELEV

R

Elevation of OWC, in coordinate system of top and
bottom or midpoint structure grids. If structure is
expressed as height above OWC, then set OWCELEV
= 0.
Default Value = 0

Process

292

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Write Cell Table
Name

WRITE CELL TABLE

Alternate Name WRITE CELL FILE
Function

This process writes a RESIN cell table to formatted output files, with
the cell table geometry going to its own file, and each field of the cell
table whose field number is listed goes to a file of its own.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• CELLFILE

C*24

MFDCELL

R2003.12.0

I

Range

Description and Default
Name of the input RESIN cell table.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the cell table.
Default Value = 0

MODEL

C*8

Target reservoir simulator type.
Default Value = GCOMP
Options:
THERM
RESS
GAS3D
GCOMP

• DISKFILE

C*80

Name of the formatted output cell table file to contain the
geometry of the cell table.

° INFLDS

I

Array of up to 20 field numbers indicating which cell
table fields are written to the formatted output file.
Required if VALUES are not specified.
If the property is constant, then as an alternative to
specifying a field number, the corresponding entry in the
VALUES array can be specified, as the invoked constant.

° VALUES

R

Array of up to 20 constant values. Required if INFLDS
are not specified.
Certain parameters required by some simulators can just
be constant values, rather than being a field of the cell
table. In this event, its entry in the INFLDS list is empty
and its constant value is specified in the corresponding
entry is the VALUES list.

Process

293

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

PROPNAMS C*24

Array of up to 20 property names, one for each field, in
the same position as the corresponding field in INFLDS.
Since these property names differ for different simulator
models, the program cannot just default to the name that
was given to the ZIMS field. For at least one simulator,
the set of valid names is limited.
Default Value = None

OUTFILES

Array of up to 20 names for the formatted output files.
If there are any fields written to a formatted output file,
the name for that field’s disk file must be supplied.
Default Value = None

C*80

Process

294

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Write Resin Faults
Name

WRITE RESIN FAULTS

Alternate Name WRITE FAULTS
Function

This process writes a RESIN rasterized fault file to a formatted output
file according to the desired Reservoir Simulator Model. A rasterized
RESIN fault file is a fault file in which the fault segments are parallel
to the lattice rows and columns, for use with reservoir simulators.

Parameters
Parameter
Name
• FAULTS
MFDFAULT

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

C*24
I

Description and Default
Name of the input fault file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the input fault file.
Default Value = 0

• DISKFILE

C*80

Name of the formatted output disk fault file.

MODEL

C*8

Target reservoir simulator type
Default Value = GCOMP
Options:
THERM - (Currently unavailable)
RESS - (Currently unavailable)
GAS3D (Currently unavailable)
GCOMP

Process

295

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Write Resin Wells
Name

WRITE RESIN WELLS

Alternate Name WRITE WELL FILE
Function

Creates a formatted output file of well information according to the
conventions of the specified target reservoir simulator.
This process of creating a formatted disk file contains well information
that includes the well name and the well location relative to the RESIN
lattice coordinates. Other information may be required by particular
simulator models, such as well status required by the RESS simulator.

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

• WELLFILE

C*24

MFDWELL
• CELLFILE
MFDCELL

Name of the input well data.
0–5

C*24
I

Description and Default

Number of the MFD that contains the well data.
Default Value = 0
Name of the input RESIN cell table file.

0–5

Number of the MFD that contains the cell table.
Default Value = 0

• DISKFILE

C*80

Name of a formatted disk file to contain the well
information.

MODEL

C*8

Target reservoir simulator type.
Default Value = GCOMP
Options:
THERM
RESS
GAS3D
GCOMP

WELLFLD

R2003.12.0

I

Range

I

Field number of Well Name field in the input file. Used if
MODEL = RESS, GAS3D or GCOMP.
Default Value = First Well Name field

Process

296

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

R2003.12.0

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

XFLD

I

Field number of X field in the input file.
Default Value = First X field

YFLD

I

Field number of Y field in the input file.
Default Value = First Y field

ZFLD

I

Field number of Z Value field in the input file. Used if
MODEL = RESS.
Default Value = 0, none

WSTATFLD

I

Field number of Well Status field in the input file. Used if
MODEL = RESS.
Default Value = 0, none

Process

297

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Write Text
Name

WRITE TEXT

Alternate Name PUT INFO
Function

This process allows text or numbers to be written to either the ZCL log
file or a disk file. You specify the number of text strings or numbers,
including its format, and whether they are all written to the same line
or each to a new line. If you write to a disk file you can specify whether
to erase and write a new file or to append to an existing file.
The user can, in conjunction with other ZCL processes like DATA
BLOCK LOAD, create an external data file that the user can import to
an MFD using the IMPORT Process.
Maximum Record Length
The maximum record length is 80 characters.

Example

R2003.12.0

DATA:10

HOWMANY=5, DATATYPE=’REAL’, DATASIZE=1,
VALUE = 1.1,
2.2,
3.3,
4.4,
5.5
/

WRITETEXT:

DISKFILE=’real.out’,
REALOUTS= #10(1), 9, 10.3, 10., #10(5),
NEWLINE=’NO’
FORMATS=’F15.7’,
/

DATA:20

HOWMANY=5, DATATYPE=’TEXT’, DATASIZE=10,
VALUE = ’ONE’,
’TWO’,
’THREE’,
’FOUR’,
’FIVE’,
/

WRITETEXT:

DISKFILE=’text.out’,
TEXTOUTS=#20(1), ’TEN’, ’NINE’, #20(2), #20(5)
NEWLINE=’NO’,
NUMCHARS= 10
/

Process

298

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameters
Parameter
Name

Data
Type

DISKFILE

C*80

Name of a formatted disk file to contain the information
to export. If this parameter is blank, the information is
written to the ZCL log (screen or a file) as ZCL executes.
Note: If DISKFILE = STDOUT or STDERR, then the
output is piped to these locations (standard C
programming lingo).

NEWFILE

C*8

Overwrite or concatenate to DISKFILE if it already
exists.
Default Value = NEW
Options:
= Constant average velocity for the
NEW
formation
= Grid of average velocity for the
APPEND
formation

NEWLINE

C*4

Place each entry in TEXTOUTS or REALOUTS on a
new line or concatenate to the end of the same line.
Default Value = YES
Options:

TEXTOUTS

C*80

NUMCHARS

I

JUSTCHRS

C*8

Range

Description and Default

YES

= Place each entry on a new line

NO

= Concatenate the entries at the end
of the same line

Array of up to 20 character strings to write either to the
specified DISKFILE or to the ZCL log.
1–80

Array of up to 20 integers defining the length of and in the
same position as the corresponding TEXTOUTS entry. If
necessary, each TEXTOUTS string is padded to this size.
Default Value = 80
Array of up to 20 strings specifying whether the
TEXTOUTS string is left or right justified, in the same
position as the corresponding TEXTOUTS entry.
Default Value = LEFT
Options:
= Left justify the string
LEFT
RIGHT

R2003.12.0

= Right justify the string

Process

299

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range

Description and Default

REALOUTS

R

Array of up to 20 floating point values to write to
DISKFILE.
If an integer value, DATA BLOCK entry, or MACRO
parameter is specified, then it is converted to a real value
before being used.

FORMATS

C*20

An array of up to 20 FORTRAN formats, in the same
position as the corresponding REALOUTS value.
Default Value = F15.7

ORDERS

C*4

Array of up to 40 strings, one for each TEXTOUTS and
REALOUTS parameter value, specifying the order in
which the information is written.
Default Value = All available TEXTOUTS strings are
written followed by all available REALOUTS
values
Options:
= Print the next TEXTOUTS string
TEXT
REAL

R2003.12.0

= Print the next REALOUTS string

Process

300

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

ZGF Info
Name

ZGF INFO

Alternate Name
Function

This process provides information on a graphics file. A report is
generated for each picture. The report includes picture name, area of
interest details, and a graphic segment list (LGBs). The report can be
written to a formatted disk file, or displayed to the screen.

Parameters

R2003.12.0

Parameter
Name

Data
Type

Range Description and Default

• ZGFNAME

C*80

Name of graphics file for which information is displayed.

LGBTYPES

C*12

Display of the LGBs of each picture.
Default Value = DISPLAY
Options:
DISPLAY
NO DISPLAY

HEADERS

C*12

Display of picture information. This includes Area of
Interest information.
Default Value = DISPLAY
Options:
DISPLAY
NO DISPLAY

DISKFILE

C*80

Name of the formatted disk file used for writing the
output. If blank, then the output is displayed to the screen.
Default Value = Blank

Process

301

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

Index
ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2
A

F

APPEND XY177-178
ASSM34-35
AVERAGE SW GRID289-291

FLT RASTER166

C
CELL VAL = WELL VAL170
CHANGE MFD NAME168
CLIP POLYGON62-63
COMPRESS MFD225
COMPRESS ZGF226
CP GRID QA156-158
D
DATA POSTING64-65
DATA POSTING NEW66-98
DATA SUBSETTING191-208
DATA TO DATA214-217
DLS POSTING100-102
DRAW LINES112-114

G
GRID PATCHING21
GRID POSTING103-104
GRID TO GRID218-220
GRID VEL278-279
I
INIT167
INTERSECT SURFS228
L
LATTICE POSTING105
LEASE POSTING106-111
LIST FILES212
location edit191-194, 195-203
N

E
E PRJ155
edit
location191-194, 195-203
range191-194, 195-197, 206-208
thinning191-197, 203-206

R2003.12.0

N ARR6-7, 8-12
NADCON1
NIV TIME TO DEPTH2-5
NIVA2-5
NORTH ARROW6-7, 8-12
NTS POSTING115-122

Index

301

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

O

R

OVERLAY13-14
OVERPOST RESOLVE15-20

RANGE EDIT164-165
range edit191-194, 195-197, 206-208
RASTERIZE FAULTS166
REINITIALIZE167
RELIEF SHADING210-211
REMOVE CHAR DUPS253
REN PIC169
RENAME MFD168
RENAME PICT169
RESET CELL TO WELL170
RESOLVE OVERPOST15-20
ROTA171-172
ROTATE DATA171-172

P
P GRID40-46
P TEXT150-151
PATCH GRID21
PIC STATS36-39
PICT22-33
PICTURE22-33
PICTURE ASSEMBLY34-35
PICTURE STATS36-39
POINT GRID PLUS47-61, 161-163
POINT GRIDDING40-46
POLYGON CLIP62-63
POST DATA64-65
POST DATA NEW66-98
POST DLS100-102
POST GRID NODES103-104
POST LATTICE105
POST LEASE106-111
POST LINES112-114
POST NTS115-122
POST SEISMIC123-131
POST SEISMIC NEW132-146
POST STAR SYMBOL147-149
POST TEXT150-151
PROJ152-154
PROJECTION152-154
PROJECTION END155
PUT INFO297-299
Q
QUALITY ASSURE156-158
QUICK VOL159-160
QUICK VOLUMETRICS159-160

R2003.12.0

S
S B LNAR175-176
SCAL173-174
SCALE BAR173-174
SCALE BIAS LNAR175-176
SCALE XY270-271
SEIS APPEND XY177-178
SEIS INTERP THIN179
SEIS THIN179
SEISMIC POST NEW132-146
SEISMIC POSTING123-131
SELECT191-208
SHADED RELIEF210-211
SHOW FILES212
SINGLE DATA OPS214-217
SINGLE GRID OPS218-220
SORT221-222
SPAWN223-224
SQUASH MFD225
SQUASH ZGF226
STAR SYMBOL POST147-149
STOP227
SURFACE INTERSECT228
SURFACES DIAGRAM229-248
SYNTAX249
SYNTAX ONLY249
SYSTEM PARMS250

Index

302

Landmark

ZCL Operator’s Manual, Volume 2

T

W

T BLK263-264
T COORD265
T T D I257
T T D II276-277
TEXT251
THIN254-256
THIN TEXT FIELDS253
THINNING254-256
thinning edit191-197, 203-206
THREE D TIME TO DEPT257
THREE D TIMESLICE258-259
THROW GRIDDING47-61, 161-163
TIME MIGR260-262
TIME MIGRATION260-262
TITLE BLOCK263-264
TRANSFORM COORDS265
TREND267-269
TREND GRIDDING267-269
TRI SCALING270-271
TSLICE258-259
TXT251

WATER SATURATION289-291
WRITE CELL FILE292-293
WRITE CELL TABLE292-293
WRITE FAULTS294
WRITE RESIN FAULTS294
WRITE RESIN WELLS295-296
WRITE TEXT297-299
WRITE WELL FILE295-296
Z
Z3D229-248
ZGF INFO300

U
USER FILTER272-275
USER GRID FILTER272-275
V
VEL FUN TIME TO DEPT276-277
VELOCITY GRIDDING278-279
VOL REPORT280-281
VOLM286-288
VOLUME REPORT280-281
VOLUMETRICS286-288

R2003.12.0

Index

303